AR fx-9860GIII ) fx-9750GIIIاﻹﺻﺪار (3.60 ) fx-7400GIIIاﻹﺻﺪار (3.20 )اﻹﺻﺪار (3.60 اﻟﺴﻮﻓﺘﻮﻳﺮ دﻟﻴﻞ اﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﻮﻳﺐ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ اﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ CASIO https://edu.casio.com ﻛﺘﻴﺒﺎت اﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮة ﺑﻌﺪة ﻟﻐﺎت ﻓﻲ اﳌﻮﻗﻊ https://world.casio.
• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ. • ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ. • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ.
ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ – ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﹼﻻ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ -ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ 1-1........................................................................................................................................................................ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ1-2..........................................................................................................................................................................
.12ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ5-30 ...................................................................................................................................................... ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ6-1..................................................................................................
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .1ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ 11-1 ........................................................................................................................................... ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ .1ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ12-1 ............................................................................................................................................ .2ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ12-1 ........................................................................
ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ – ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﹼﻻ ﹰ 0 kﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ uﳕﺎﺫﺝ -ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺭﲟﺎ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﺸﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ fx-9860GIIIﻭ ﻟﺮﲟﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻰﺀ.
uﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ • ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ . 6 ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﻛﻠﺔ ﻻﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ . • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ) 1(COMPﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ 1ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ } {COMPﻭﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ -ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ .
kﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ .ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻻﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﺗﺎﺭﺓ . ﺳﻨﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ STAT • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻻﳝﻦ ﻟﻼﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ. ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ.
ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ *TVM )ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ *E-CON3 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ "ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ. LINK ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. MEMORY ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻻﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ. SYSTEM ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ،ﻭ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ.
uﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ 1.2E+12ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟـ 1.2 × 1012ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺮﻙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ 1.2ﺍﺛﻨﻰ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﲔ ﻻﻥ ﺍﻻﺱ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ .ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﻲ .1,200,000,000,000 1.2E–03ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻝ 1.2 × 10–3ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺮﻙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ 1.2ﺛﻼﺙ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻷﻥ ﺍﻻﺱ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ .ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ .0.0012 ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ. 10–2 (0.01) > |x|, |x| > 1010 .......................
k ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ،ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ .wﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ eﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ. • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ .*1ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ) ..!D(INSﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻛﺎ ” “Iﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻛـ ” “ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ .ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ eﺍﻭ d ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ eﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ .ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ d ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ. • ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﻌﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ .
w ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J ﻳﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺎﳋﻄﺎ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ db ﻧﻔﹼ ﺬ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ. w k ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ) ﺃﻭ ﻗﹼﺺ( ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻟﺼﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ. • ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ .ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ " )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .
.2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ. .3ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(CUTﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ . ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ uﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).!j(PASTE ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ A )!j(PASTE kﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ* .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
.4ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ .ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ. • fx-9750GIIIﻭ :fx-9860GIIIﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺎ )ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳋﻴﺎﺭ " "1:Allﻣﺤﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ( .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻃﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ "ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻣ ﹴﺮ ﻣﺎ ) fx-9860GIII/fx-9750GIIIﻓﻘﻂ(" )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .(1-10 .5ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) (c, fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(INPUTﺍﻭ .
uﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ) fx-9860GIII/fx-9750GIIIﻓﻘﻂ( ﲢﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺴﺠﻞ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ. .1ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).5(HIST • ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ. .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(INPUTﺃﻭ .w uﻇﻴﻔﺔ fx-9860GIII/fx-9750GIII) QR Codeﻓﻘﻂ( • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ QR Codeﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﹸﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ .
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .QR Code • ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Aﺃﻭ .!J .4ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻬﻢ! • ﺍﻝ fx-7400GIIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ " "Mathﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ " ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ /ﺍﻻﺧﺮﺍﺝ" ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-31ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ,ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺗﻚ. • ﻭﻛﻞ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ.
ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ /ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ( )!)(x –1 5 ' )'(!x 6 )'!((3 9 )'!M(x 9 )!I(ex 6 )!l(10x 6 ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺐ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ex 10x ﺑﺎﻳﺖ )log(a,b )ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*(2 7 ) Absﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ( )ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ* ( 6 )ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*(2 7 )ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*(2 7 )ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ MATHﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ*(2
)d f(x • } } ... {d/dxﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ x = a dx d2 f(x)x = a { 2 • }} ...
1 1+ 0 x + 1dx ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ :3 ﻣﺜﺎﻝ Ab+4(MATH)6(g)1(∫dx) v+b ea fb e w 2× 1 2 2 2 1 2 ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ Ac*4(MATH)1(MAT)1(2×2) 'bcc ee !x(')ce e!x(')cee'bcc w fx-9860GIII, fx-9750GIII (Math :Input/Output) fx-9750GIII (Mth/Mix :Input/Output) 1-15 :4 ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
uﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻱ ﺳﻬﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺮﻯ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ. uﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻳﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ .ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ) 120ﻧﻘﺎﻁ( .ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳊﺪ.
ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ' ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ )'(!x ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺐ )'!((3 ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )'!M(x ex 10x )log(a,b )!I(ex )!l(10x )4(MATH)2(logab ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ )4(MATH)3(Abs ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ )4(MATH)4(d/dx ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ )4(MATH)5(d2/dx2 ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ )4(MATH)6(g )1(∫dx Σﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ )4(MATH)6(g ) (2(Σ • ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ،ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) !D(INSﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ .
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ (wﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻟﻺﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ ﹰ. ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ)aD(UNDO ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﹰ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ).aD(UNDO • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .Aﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ Aﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺭﺟﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )aD(UNDOﺳﻴﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ .
• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ،1 × 6ﺃﻭ .6 × 1ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،VctAnsﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ. • ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ .ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ListAnsﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ. • ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻓﻚ ﺍﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ.
• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ. ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻓﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻴﻬﺎ.
ﻫﺎﻡ! • ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،e • ACTﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳋﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻲ. • ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،RUN • MATﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ. Comp :Mode Math :fx-9860GIII :Input/Outputﻭ Math :fx-9750GIIIﺃﻭ Mth/Mixﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،e • ACTﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. uﻧﺴﺦ ﺧﻂ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ .
* 3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﺇﻥ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .
3 = 0.1249387366 4 A4(MATH)3(Abs)l3'4w log 2 + 3 1 = 73 5 4 20 1.5 + 2.3i = 3 + 23 i 2 10 A2'5e+3!'(()1e4w ) Fﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ A1.5+2.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ ×8 33 1 2 1 6 5 13 4 ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ. beb'ceedde bd'eeefege *iw uﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻝ Mat J !c(Mat)!-(Ans)a !c(Mat)a)(J)w • ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ Dﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻲ( ،ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .
• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻟﻸﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ. • ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-12ﻭ "ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (1-22ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ.RUN • MAT • ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﻭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RUN • MATﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ، e • ACTﺍﻧﻈﺮ ’’ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﺓ .
uﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ EQUA ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ EQUAﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ. • ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ )) (1(SIMLﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ )) ، (2(POLYﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ،ﻭ ' ،ﻭ πﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ(. • ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﻞ )) ، (3(SOLVﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﳊﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ x2 + 3x + 5 = 0ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .
}} ... {ANGLﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ /ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ،و ﳌﺪﺧﻼت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ /اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ{ }} ... {ESYMﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﻮز اﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ{ • • • }} ... {PICTﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ /إﻋﺎدة اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{ • }} ... {FMEMﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة{ • }} ... {LOGICﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﳌﺸﻐﻞ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ{ • }} ... {CAPTﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﻂ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ{ • }} ... {TVMﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ اﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ{ • ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر " "Mathﻻﻋﺪادات وﺿﻊ اﳌﺪﺧﻼت /اﺮﺟﺎت ﻓﺘﻜﻮن ﺑﻨﻮد PICTو FMEMو CAPTﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد. .
• }} ... {Yﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{y- • }} ... {y}/{Σy}/{Σy2}/{Σxy}/{σx}/{sy}/{minY}/{maxYﻭﺳﻂ{}/ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ{}/ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ{}/ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ x-ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ }/{y-ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{}/ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{}/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{}/ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{ • }} ... {GRPHﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{ • }} ... {a}/{b}/{c}/{d}/{eﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ{ • }} ... {r}/{r2ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ{}/ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ{ • }} ... {MSeﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ{ • }} ... {Q1}/{Q3ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺃﻻﻭﻝ}/{-ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ{ • }} ...
}=X} ... {Xوﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ{ • • إﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬه اﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻗﺒﻞ إدﺧﺎل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة. u * — DYNAاﺳﺘﺮداد ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ • u }} ... {Strt}/{End}/{Pitchﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪاﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎق اﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{}/ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎق اﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{{}/ﺗﺰاﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{ — TABLاﺳﺘﺮداد اﻋﺪادات اﳉﺪول وإﺣﺘﻮاء ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت }} ... {Strt}/{End}/{Pitchﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪأ ﻧﻄﺎق اﳉﺪول{}/ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎق اﳉﺪول{}/ﺗﺰاﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﳉﺪول{ • • }} ...
.7ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )(PRGM ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ) (PRGMﺃﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUNﺃﻭ PRGMﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) .!J(PRGMﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ).(PRGM • ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) (PRGMﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ” “Mathﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ”ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. • }} ........ {COMﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{ • }} .......... {CTLﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{ • }} ....... {JUMPﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ{ • }?{ } .............ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ{ • }^{ } ...........
.2ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) !m(SET UPﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ. • ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﹰ ﳑﻜﻨﺎ .ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ. .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ .4ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) 1ﺍﻟﻰ ( 6ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ. .5ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.
u ﻣﺸﺘﻖ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ( • }} ... {On}/{Offﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{}/ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{ﺣﲔ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ،ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺛﺮ . u ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ( • }} ... {Deg}/{Rad}/{Graﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ{}/ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ{}/ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ{ u ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ • }} ... {Realﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ{ • }} ... {a+bi}/{r∠θﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ}ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ{}/ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ{. u ) Coordﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ( • }} ...
u ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ) ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ( • }} ... {None}/{PICTﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ{}/ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{ uﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ ) ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ( •} u {}/ {}/ {}/ { } ...ﻋﺎﺩﻱ{}/ﻛﺜﻴﻒ{}/ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ{}/ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ{ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ* ) ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ( • }} ... {Cnt}/{Stopﻏﻴﺮﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ)ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ({}/ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ 10ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ{ u ﻣﺤﻞ* )ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ( • }} ...
u ) *Imp Multiﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﻨﻲ( • } ... {Onﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ "ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .2-2 • } ... {Offﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﻨﻲ 5ﻭ ) 7ﻟـ"ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ (2-2ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺮﻳﺢ )0ﻟـ"ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ"(. u ) *Auto Calcﺍﻛﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ( • }} ...
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ذاﻛﺮة ﻻﻗﻄﺔ ﻫﺬة اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪا اﺧﺘﻴﺎر وﺿﻊ اﳌﺪﺧﻼت /اﺮﺟﺎت اﳋﻄﻴﺔ. .1ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN•MATأو ،(RUNإﺿﻐﻂ )K6(g )ﻓﻲ ال 6(g)5(CAPT)(4(CAPT) (fx-7400GIII )1(Rcl .2ادﺧﻞ ﻋﺪد ذاﻛﺮة ﻻﻗﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎق 1اﻟﻰ ، 20ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻫﺬا ﻳﻌﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة ازﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪدت. .3ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺼﻮرة و اﻟﻌﻮدة اﻟﻲ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺪأت ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮة ، 1وإﺿﻐﻂ . J • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﻻﻣﺮ RclCaptﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺻﻮرة اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ذاﻛﺮة ﻻﻗﻄﺔ.
ﻫﺎﻡ! ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﲢﻴﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﺴﻴﺔ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﲔ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﲢﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ .ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﺳﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻻﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. uﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ .1ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ kﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ • ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ،ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ -ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ. • ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﲡﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑـ 15ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ .ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ. • ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ. ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ 56 × (–12) ÷ (–2.5) = 268.8 56*-12/-2.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2 200 ÷ 7 × 14 = 400 ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ 200/7*14w 400 ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ 3 !m(SET UP) ff 1(Fix)dwJw 400.000 ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻝ 10 ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ 200/7w * 14w 28.571 Ans × I 400.000 • ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ: ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ،ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ. x x ', ', log, In, e , 10 , sin, cos, tan, sin–1, cos–1, tan–1, sinh, cosh, tanh, sinh–1, cosh–1, tanh–1, (–), d, h, b, o, Neg, Not, Det, Trn, Dim, Identity, Ref, Rref, Sum, Prod, Cuml, Percent, AList, Abs, Int, Frac, Intg, Arg, Conjg, ReP, ImP 3 2*7ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ، Aﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ، Cﻭ ﺍﻗﻮﺍﺱ.
ﻣﺜﺎﻻ • fx-9860GIII ،fx-9750GIII ،fx-7400GIII ) = Radﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ( 2 + 3 × (log sin2π2 + 6.8) = 22.07101691 • (Imp Multi: On) fx-9750GIII • fx-7400GIII ،fx-9860GIII • (Imp Multi: Off) fx-9750GIII 6 ÷ 2 (1 + 2) = 1 6 ÷ 2 (1 + 2) = 9 6 ÷ 2π = 0.9549296586 (Input/Output: Math) 6 ÷ 2π = 3π • ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ،ﻭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ Σﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ /ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ،ﻭ RndFixﺃﻭ logabﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .
uﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ' ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ' ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ' ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﺪﺗﲔ. ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ' ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. 'b ± d e '± a 'b , ± d ± a 'b, ± a f c • ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ) (a، b، c، d، e، fﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ '.
uﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ π ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻜﻞ πﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ nπ nﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻲ |.|106 b b • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ πﺃﻭ a π c c b b ﻟﻜﻦ} ،ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ + aﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ +bﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ {cﻳﺤﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ 9ﺃﻭ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ c c ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ cﺛﻼﺙ.*2 aﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ*1*2 .
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 1 ))6 ÷ (2(1 + 2 → )6 ÷ 2(1 + 2 ))6 ÷ (A(1 + 2 → )6 ÷ A(1 + 2 )1 ÷ ((2 + 3)sin30 → 1 ÷ (2 + 3)sin30 • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ،ﻭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ،ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ*. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 2 → 6 ÷ 2π )6 ÷ (2π '2 ÷ 2 '2 → 2 ÷ (2 )2 → 4π ÷ 2π )4π ÷ (2π ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ " "Offﻟـ" "Imp Multiﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
kﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ uﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ( ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺏ 28ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ 15ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻠﺪﻟﻴﻞ. ﺍﺑﺠﺪﻱ plus r ،ﻭ . θﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﹼ • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺣﲔ ﺇﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ uﻟﺘﻌﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ .
• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ. uﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ][OPTN]-[FMEM ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ .ﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻃﻮﻝ ،ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ GRAPHﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ PRGMﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ. • }} ...
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ *)K6(g)6(g)3(FMEM )4(SEE )* fx-7400GIII: 2(FMEM uﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ 1 ﻣﺜﺎﻝ A *)K6(g)6(g)3(FMEM 1(STO)bw )* fx-7400GIII: 2(FMEM • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. kﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) wﻭﺍﻻ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ w ﺧﻄﺄ( ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ.
ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ fx-9860GIII, fx-9750GIII • ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ /ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ .ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-19 • ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻔﺎ ) (faal(B)wﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ.
uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ )(Fix ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ 1(Fix)cw ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ).(n = 0 to 9 • ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺪﺩ. uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )(Sci ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ 2(Sci)dw ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ).(n = 0 to 9 ﲢﺪﻳﺪ 0ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﺒﺮﺓ .10 • ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
.4ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ kﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ. • ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ . K ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUNﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .PRGM uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ )(HYP ][OPTN]-[HYP • } ... {sinh}/{cosh}/{tanhﺯﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ }{sine}/{cosine}/{tangent • } ...
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ )(ANGL ][OPTN]-[ANGL • }} ... {°}/{r}/{gﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ{}/ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ{}/ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ{ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ. • }” ’ } ... {°ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(،ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ،ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ /ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ /ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ{ • }” ’ } ... {°ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ /ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ /ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ{ • ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ }” ’ {°ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. • }( ...
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ cos ( π rad) = 0.5 3 !m(SET UP)cccccc*2(Rad)J (π)/3)w !(c !m(SET UP)cccccc*1(Deg)J 2 • sin 45° × cos 65° = 0.5976724775 2*s45*c65w*1 sin–10.5 = 30° !s(sin–1) 0.5*2w ) xﺣﲔ (sinx = 0.5 * fx-7400GIII: ccccc * 1ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ *. * 2ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ. kﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻴﺔ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ log 1.23 (log101.23) = 0.08990511144 log28 = 3 l1.
kﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ !x(') 2+!x(')5w*1 ' '2 + 5 = 3.65028154 (–3)2 = (–3) × (–3) = 9 1 –––––– = 12 1 1 –– – –– 3 4 (-3)xw )(3!)(x−1)-4!)(x−1 )!)(x−1)w 8! (= 1 × 2 × 3 × ....
• ﻭﻳﻮﻟﺪ ” “aﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ .ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻝ ” .“aﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ 9ﻟـ aﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ. • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ Ran# 0ﺗﻬﻴﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ Ran#ﻭ RanList#ﻣﻌﺎ .ﻳﻬﻴﺊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﲔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Ran#ﻭ ،RanList# ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ. ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ Ran# ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ Ran# )K6(g)3(PROB)*4(RAND )ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(.
uﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ )(Ranlnt# ﻳﻜﹼﻮﻥ RanInt#ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﲔ ﻋﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﲔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﻦ. RanInt# (A, B [,n]) A < B |A|,|B| < 1E10 B – A < 1E10 1 < n < 999 ﺍﳌﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ .ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ • ﻳﻮﻟﺪ Aﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ Bﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ .ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟـ nﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﹼ ﻟـ nﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ )RanInt# (1, 5 )ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (.
uﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ )(RanBin# ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺛﺮﻱ nﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ .p 0
kﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﻓﻴﻖ uﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ !n !)(n – r uﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ !n = nCr !)r! (n – r = nPr • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ.
kﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ • ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ .ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .1-12 • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ 2'*5+3'*1'*4w 2 1 73 ––– = –– –– + 3 5 4 20 **f )*1ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ( = 3.65 1'*2578+1'*4572w 1 1 ––––– + ––––– = 6.066202547 × 10–4 *2 2578 4572 1'*2*.5w 1 –– × 0.5 = 0.
kﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ )(AND, OR, NOT, XOR ][OPTN]-[LOGIC ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ. • } AND} ... {Xor}/{Not}/{Or}/{Andﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{ OR}/ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{ NOT}/ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{ XOR}/ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ{ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Compﻟـ Modeﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ.
kﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ÷ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ]÷[OPTN]-[CALC]-[Int ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ”÷ “Intﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻞ ﺣﲔ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺁﺧﺮ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻦ 107 ÷ 7 )AbahK4(CALC)*6(g 6(g)1(Int÷)h w )* fx-7400GIII: 3(CALC kﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ÷ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ][OPTN]-[CALC]-[Rmdr ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ” “Rmdrﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺁﺧﺮ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1 15 60 ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ 5 1 15 = = 4 60 20 Abf'*gaw K4(CALC)**6(g)6(g)3(Simp)w * fx-7400GIII: v )** fx-7400GIII: 3(CALC 3(Simp)w ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ "=."F ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2 27 63 ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻝ 9 3 27 = 7 63 **)Ach'*gdwK4(CALC 6(g)6(g)3(Simp)jw * fx-7400GIII: v )** fx-7400GIII: 3(CALC • ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ.
kﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )f(x ][OPTN]-[CALC]-[SolvN ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ SolvNﳊﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) f(xﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﶈﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ .ﻭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻴﺔ. )]ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ,ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ] [,ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ] [,ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ=[ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ( SolvN • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ. • ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ "]ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ=[ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ" ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ .ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻤﺔ Aﺧﻼﻝ ،r ،Zﻭ .θﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻓﻴﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ = .
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ،ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ،Axﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟـ ) f' (aﻛـ: )f (a + Ax) – f (a ––––––––––––– ⱌ )f ' (a Ax ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻘﺪﱘ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ x = 3ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ y = x3 + 4x2 + x – 6ﻣﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﺡ ﻝ “tol” = 1E – 5 ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ).f(x AK4(CALC)* 2(d/dx)vMd+evx+v-g, )* fx-7400GIII: 3(CALC ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ x=aﻟﻠﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﻪ.
• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ Σﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺣﻞ ﻭ RndFixﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ logabﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ. • ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ 1E–10ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ. • ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ][OPTN]-[CALC]-[d2/dx2 ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ: ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ x ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ x ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ x ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ x ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻧﻘﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ x ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ . A • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (Radﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ.
ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ. b,f, ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ. -e)w ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2 b ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ )ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ = (Deg ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﹼﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ. ) (1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎ.
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) ،f(xﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Xﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ،ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﻣﻦ Aﺍﻟﻰ Zﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ،X (θ ،rﺗﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﺜﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ " "tolﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ " ،"tolﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻝ .1E–5 • ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
kﻷﺩﻧﻰ/ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ][OPTN]-[CALC]-[FMin]/[FMax ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ/ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ .
.6ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﳉﻤﻊ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ 2-1ﺍﻟﻲ .2-16 ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. } ... {Realﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ* • • } ...
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ][OPTN]-[CPLX]-[i ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
)AK3(CPLX)*2(Abs (d+e1(i))w )ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ( )* fx-7400GIII: 2(CPLX )AK3(CPLX)*3(Arg (d+e1(i))w )ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﺔ( )* fx-7400GIII: 2(CPLX • ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ(. kﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ ][OPTN]-[CPLX]-[Conj ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ a + biﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ .
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ' 1 +ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ 3 i *!m(SET UP)cccccc 1(Deg)c2(a+bi)J )Ab+(!x(')d K3(CPLX)**1(i)6(g)3('r∠θ)w * fx-7400GIII: ccccc )** fx-7400GIII: 2(CPLX Ac!v(∠)ga K3(CPLX)*6(g)4('a+bi)w )* fx-7400GIII: 2(CPLX • ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ/ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ 10ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ. • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 21ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ،ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ.
ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ 16ﺭﻗﻢ 11ﺭﻗﻢ 10ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ 8ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ • ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ. ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ F E D C B A ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ z y x w v u t c s I l v ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ • ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ.
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﻠﻄﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،12310ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ. )!m(SET UP ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ“ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 3(Hex)J A1(d~o)1(d)bcdw kﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(LOGﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ. • }} ... {Negﺳﺎﻟﺐ{ *1 • }{NOT}*2/{AND}/{OR}/{XOR}/{XNOR}*3 ...
uﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ) 2210ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ )A!m(SET UP ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ“ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .2(Dec)J 1(d~o)1(d)ccw J3(DISP)3('Bin)w 4('Oct)w .8ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺎﻡ! • ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ . fx-7400GIII ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RUN • MATﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1('MATﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
k ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1('MATﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ. ) m … m × nﺻﻒ( × ) nﻋﻤﻮﺩ( ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ …Noneﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ. • } ... {DEL}/{DEL•Aﻳﺤﺬﻑ }ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ{}/ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ{ • }} ... {DIMﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ({ • } ... {CSVﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ CSVﻭﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ CSVﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻛﺮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Mat Aﺇﻟﻰ Mat Zﻭ ) (MatAnsﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-43 ﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-52 • } ...
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.. bwcwdw ewfwgw )ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ .ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ،wﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ(. • ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ( .ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ .ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﻳﺔ. uﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ.
uاﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻒ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(R • OPﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن اﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ اﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎة ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. • }} ... {SWAPﺗﺒﺎدل اﻟﺼﻒ{ • }} ... {×Rwﻣﻨﺘﺞ اﻟﺼﻒ اﶈﺪد واﻟﻌﺪدي{ • }} ... {×Rw+إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ واﺣﺪ وﻣﻨﺘﺞ اﻟﺼﻒ اﶈﺪد ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪدي{ • }} ... {Rw+إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺼﻒ اﶈﺪد اﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ آﺧﺮ{ uﻟﺘﺒﺎدل ﺻﻔﲔ اﳌﺜﺎل ﻟﺘﺒﺎدل اﻟﺼﻔﻮف اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ و اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ اﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﲡﺮي ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻣﺜﻠﺔ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 3 )1(R • OP)4(Rw+ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺘﺔ. cw ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ. dww uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ • }} ... {DELﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{ • }} ... {INSﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{ • }} ...
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ • }} ... {DELﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{ • }} ... {INSﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{ • }} ... {ADDﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{ uﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ 2 3(COL)e )1(DEL kﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ CVS ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﳌﻠﻒ CVSﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Mat Aﺍﻟﻰ ،Mat Zﻭ .(MatAnsﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) Mat Aﺍﻟﻰ ،Mat Zﻭ (MatAnsﻛﻤﻠﻒ .CSV uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .
uﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ CSV .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ .CSV .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).4(CSV)2(SV • AS • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ. .3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .CSV • ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺬﺭ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "."ROOT ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ • ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻓﻲ ﹼ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(OPEN .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SV • AS .
uﺻﻴﻐﺔ إدﺧﺎل ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Mat ﻳﺒﲔ اﳉﺪول اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ان ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﻣﺮ اﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ. a12 ... a1n a22 ... a2n ... ... ... ] ]= [ [a11, a12, ..., a1n] [a21, a22, ..., a2n] .... [am1, am2, ..., amn a11 a21 am2 ...
ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ } {Dimﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2 ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ B !*( { )c,d!/( } )a )K2(MAT)6(g)2(Dim 6(g)1(Mat)al(B)w • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ " "Dimﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ. uﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻭﳌﻸ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﳉﻤﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ.
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1 ﳌﻞﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Aﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 3 )K2(MAT)6(g)3(Fill d,6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w 1(Mat)av(A)w • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ " "Fillﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2 ﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ: 3 =B 4 1 =A 2 )K2(MAT)5(Aug 1(Mat)av(A), 1(Mat)al(B)w • ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﺘﲔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺠﻤﻌﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ .ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﲢﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ.
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ][OPTN]-[MAT ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ. uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .RUN • MAT .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Kﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 2(MATﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ. ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ. • }} ... {Matﺃﻣﺮ ) Matﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ({ • }} ... {Detﺃﻣﺮ ) Detﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ({ • }} ... {Trnﺃﻣﺮ ) Trnﺃﻣﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ({ • }} ...
uﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Det ﻟﺘﺤﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A 3 2 1 6 5 4 0 −1 −2 )K2(MAT)3(Det)1(Mat av(A)w • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ )ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ( .ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﲢﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ. • ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 2 × 2ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ. a11 a12 = a11a22 – a12a21 a21 a22 = ||A • ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ 3 × 3ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ.
uﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Ref ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﺎﻭﺳﻲ ﻻﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A 3 2 1 6 5 4 )K2(MAT)6(g)4(Ref 6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w uﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﺘﺰﻝ ][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Rref ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﺘﺰﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
• ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻮﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ. 1 0 0 1 = A A–1 = A–1 A = E ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Aﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ .
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ: ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = D 1+i –2 + 2i –1 + i 1+i )AK6(g)4(NUM)1(Abs K2(MAT)1(Mat)as(D)w • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ. i, Abs, Arg, Conjg, ReP, ImP ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﺄ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻼﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ.
ﺣﻮﻝ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )(VctAns ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ .ﺗﻨﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﺰﱢﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﹰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ. • ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﲢﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ. • ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ. ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ).
ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ • ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﻲ ﻫﻲ 1 × 2ﺃﻭ 1 × 3ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ .ﻳﺠﺐ ﹰ 2 × 1ﺃﻭ .3 × 1 • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻟﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ. • ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﻫﻲ ±1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ.
uﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﺮﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1 ][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Vct ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ):(Vct A + Vct B ] Vct B = [ 3 4 ] Vct A = [ 1 2 )K2(MAT)6(g)6(g)1(Vct av(A)+1(Vct)al(B)w ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 2 ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ):(Vct A × Vct B 3 4 = Vct B ] Vct A = [ 1 2 )K2(MAT)6(g)6(g)1(Vct av(A)*1(Vct)al(B)w ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 3 ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ):(Mat A × Vct B 1 2 = Vct B 2 1 1 2
uﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Angle ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ ] Vct B = [ 3 4 ] Vct A = [ 1 2 )K2(MAT)6(g)6(g 4(Angle)1(Vct)av(A), 1(Vct)al(B))w uﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ][OPTN]-[MAT]-[UntV ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ] Vct A = [ 5 5 )K2(MAT)6(g)6(g 5(UntV)1(Vct)av(A))w uﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ )ﺣﺠﻤﻪ( ][OPTN]-[MAT]-[Norm ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺣﺠﻤﻪ( ] Vct A = [ 1 3 )K2(MAT)6(g)6(g)6(g )1(Norm)6(g)
• ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻣﺜﻞ ” (“AREAﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ” (“TIMEﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ. • ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (2-58ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ. kﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ][OPTN]-[CONV ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ.
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ fm ﻓﻴﺮﻣﻲ cm3 ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ Å ﺍﳒﺴﺘﺮﻭﻡ mL ﻣﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ μm ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻣﺘﺮ L ﻟﺘﺮ cm ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ in3 ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺔ m ﻣﺘﺮ ft3 ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ km ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ AU ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ mm ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ m3 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ )fl_oz(UK ﺍﻭﻧﺲ )fl_oz(US ﺍﻻﻭﻧﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ l.y.
ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ K ﻛﻠﻔﻦ kPa ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ °F ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻲ mmH2O ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ °R ﺭﺍﻧﻜﲔ mmHg ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺯﺋﺒﻘﻲ m/s ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ km/h ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ knot ﻋﻘﺪﺓ inHg ft/s ﻗﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ lbf/in2 mile/h ﻣﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ bar u ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﺫﺭﻳﺔ kgf/cm2 mg ﺿﻐﻂ °C ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻴﻠﻮﺯﻳﺔ Pa ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﺠﺮﺍﻡ atm ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻮﻱ
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ 3ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ 26ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ،ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ 6ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﲤﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 26 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 5 4 0 0 2 0 3 9 0 • • • • ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 4 ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3.
uﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) { (*! ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ , ﺑﲔ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) } ( !/ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ. ) } (!*( { )g,h,i!/ .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻚ. w • ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ،ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ.
uﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)3(DELﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ. ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺎﻭﺭﺓ .ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ . uﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .
.3ﺍﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ !aﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ . ALPHA-LOCK ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﺳﻨﺔ -(Y)c(E)v(A)g(R)w • ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUN !b(List) n!+( [ )a!-( ] )w ) = nﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26 • ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. • ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﻟـ "ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ.
ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ).6(g)1(TOOL)1(SRT • A .2ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ "ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ؟" ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻝ ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ .ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﻔﺮﺯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻧﺪﺧﻞ .2 cw .3ﻭ ﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ " ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ، ":ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ .ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .1 bw .
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (2, 3, 6, 5, 4) 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ،1ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2 ) (11, 12, 13, 14, 15ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ 2ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )AK1(LIST)2(L→M 1(List)b,1(List)c)w uﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Dim > wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)3(Dim)1(List) <26 - 1 • ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻫﻮ "ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ".
uﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Seq >ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ< > ,ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ< > ,ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ< > ,ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ< )K1(LIST)5(Seq > )wﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ< , • ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ListAns ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،112 ،62 ،12ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔf(x) = X2 . ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ 11ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ .
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Med ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ :ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺪﺍﺙ( ﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ .ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ 1ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ 1ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻟﺦ. • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ،ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ.
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ][OPTN]-[LIST]-[Cuml > wﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)3(Cuml)6(g)1(List) <26 - 1 • ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ .
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ListAnsﻣﺜﻼ ،ﲢﺪﻳﺪ " "AList 1 → List 2ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ AList 1ﻓﻲ .List 2 • ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ AListﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ. • ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ AListﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. .
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ } ،{ ،ﻭ ., ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ56, 82, 64 : !*( { )fg,ic, ) } (ge!/ uﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ aﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ (41, 65, 22) 3ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1 K1(LIST)1(List)da1(List)bw ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ 1(LIST)1(List)dﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ) } (.
uﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ListAnsﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ListAnsﺏ 36 K1(LIST)1(List)!-(Ans)*dgw • ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ) K1(LIST)1(List)!-(Ansﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ListAns • ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ListAnsﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ. kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻙ .
kإﺟﺮاء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺪدﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ذاﻛﺮة ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ .ListAns ﻣﺜﺎل ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 3 41 65 22 ﻹﺟﺮاء )sin (List 3 اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺰواﻳﺎ اﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺣﺪة ﻟﻠﺰاوﻳﺔ. sK1(LIST)1(List)dw .4اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 26ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1اﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ (26ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت )ﻣﻠﻒ 1اﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ .
.5ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ CSV ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ CSVﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﳌﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ .CSVﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،CSVﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(g)6(g)1(CSVﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSV ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ،(2-39ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .
.4ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﺘﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ) 1(LOAD)1(LISTﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ،3ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ، ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .
uﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ CSVﻭﺍﺣﺪ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(g)6(g)1(CSVﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .CSV .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).2(SV • AS • ﻳﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ. .3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .CSV • ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ "."ROOT • ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﹼﺪ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(OPEN .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SV • AS .
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ 4ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .EQUA • }} ... {SIMLﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ 2ﺇﻟﻰ 6ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ{ • }} ... {POLYﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ 2ﺇﻟﻰ {6 • }} ... {SOLVﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ{ .1ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ.
1 m EQUA )2 1(SIML )2(3 3 ewbw-cw-bw bwgwdwbw -fwewbw-hw )4 1(SOLV • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 15ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ،ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 10ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ. • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ( ،ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ.
• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ، wﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ .ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ. • ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(CLRﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ . .4ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ.
.3ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ Solve Calculationﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ EQUA .2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ) SOLVﺍﳊﻞ( ،ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ،ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻫﻮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ، ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ • ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ. .3ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ 5ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ Graphing ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ.
)≤5(CONV)1('Y=) to 5('Y ≤ ... 6(g)1('X=) to 5('Xﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻮع اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )≤ ....Y 6(g)1(Y>) to 4(Yاﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ Yﻋﻠﻰ اﳉﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ )≤ .... 6(g)6(g)1(X>) to 4(Xاﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ Xﻋﻠﻰ اﳉﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺎدة ﻫﺬه اﳋﻄﻮة ﻋﺪة ﻣﺮات ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﻹدﺧﺎل ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. ﺛﻢ ﻳﺠﺐ ان ﲢﺪد ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﺗﺮﻳﺪ رﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(5-6اذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺤﺪدة ﻫﻨﺎ،ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ رﺳﻮﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة. ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ .
.2ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ kﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ) V-Windowﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ xﻭ ،yﻭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ.ﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ. uﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Window .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .GRAPH .
• ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Window –9.999999999 97Eﺇﻟﻰ 9.999999999E 97 V-Window kﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Window Memory ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ. uﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ V-Window .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .GRAPH .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !3(V-WINﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ . V-Window .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(STOﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ . .
kﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. .1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .2ﲢﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ !2(ZOOM)1(BOX) ... ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﲤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ. )2(FACT ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ xﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ yﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ. ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ 3(IN)/4(OUT) ... ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺓ ، ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ. ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻻﻟﻲ 5(AUTO) ...
)2 !2(ZOOM)1(BOX 3 d~dw 4 d~d,f~fw • ﻳﺤﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺍﺗﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ،ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ. .3ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 20ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ. .
uﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ Xt3ﻭ :Yt3 x = 3 sinT y = 3 cosT ) 3(TYPE)3ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺎﺗﺮﻱ ( )dsvwﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ( x )dcvwﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ( y uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ Y1ﻭ Y2ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻝ Y3ﻭ Y4 2 Y1 = (X + 1), Y2 = X + 3 ,Y2 °Y1 to Y4.
ﰎ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ "ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-30 kﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ uﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ Y1ﻣﻦ y = 2x2 – 5ﺍﻟﻰ y = 2x2 – 3 )ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ( e ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( eeeeeDd ) ﹼ )ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ( w uﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻬﺎ. .
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ) 6(Noﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻴﺊ. • ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ (Xt2ﺳﺘﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ) ،Yt2ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ (Xt2 kﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ /ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .1ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).1(SEL ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(SELﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).
kﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 20ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ. ﻭ ﲢﻔﻆ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. • ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ .(20 • ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ • ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ • ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ /ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ • ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ) V-Windowﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( uﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺰﻥ .1ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،GRAPHﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) K1(PICT)2(RCLﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w,ﻳﺴﺘﺮﺩﹼ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ (Pict 1) 1ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .bw • ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (5-29ﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ. .
و ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 1(SELﺣﲔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ إﺣﺪى اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺆﺷﺮاﺗﻬﺎ” “ Bأو ” . “ R و اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺪون اﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ اﳉﺎﻧﺐ اﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض( اﳌﺜﺎل ارﺳﻢ ) y = x(x + 1)(x – 1ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ و اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ. اﺳﺘﺨﺪم إﻋﺪادات ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ) Xmin = –2,اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ( Xscale = 0.
.3ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. .4ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻺﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻜﺎﺭﺗﻴﺔ. .5ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ y = 2x2 + 3x – 4 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ.
3 !3(V-WIN)-cawcawfwc -bcwbcwfw awe!5(π)w!5(π)/dgwJ 4 !4(SKTCH)1(Cls)w )5(GRPH)3(Param 5 hcv-ccd.fv, hsv-csd.fvw uﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﹸﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻣﻊ ﻣﻞﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ (x + 2)(x – 1)(x – 3) dx ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﻟﺮﺳﻢ y = Ax2 – 3ﺣﻴﺚ ﺑﻠﻐﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ Aﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ -1 ،1 ،3 ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ Xscale = 1 Yscale = 2 Xmax = 5, Ymax = 10, Xmin = –5, Ymin = –10, 1 m GRAPH 2 !m(SET UP)cccc*3(Off)J * fx-7400GIII: ccc 3 !3(V-WIN)-fwfwbwc -bawbawcwJ 4 3(TYPE)1(Y=)av(A)vx-d, !+( [ )av(A)!.(=)d,b,-b !-( ] )w )5 6(DRAW • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ . • ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ.
.5ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .6ﺍﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻝ y = 2x2 + 3x – 4ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ،ﺍﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ Y=Xﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. Xscale = 2 Xmax = 5, Xmin = –5, Yscale = 5 Ymax = 10, Ymin = –10, ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ 1 m (RUN a-(Y)!.
uﲢﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﲔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ xﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ. • ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ،ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ. • ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ x-ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ. uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ xﻣﻦ –3ﺍﻟﻰ ، 3ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ .
ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(TABLﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ .ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ x ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .(3 ،2 ،1 ،0 ،-1 ،-2 ،-3) 6 ﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ 6ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ،ﲟﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻴﺔ. uﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ.
• }} ... {G • CON}/{G • PLTﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ{}/ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ{ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺮ(، ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ. • ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﻏﻴﺮ (x-ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻭﻝ. kﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻧﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ eﻭ dﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻱ ﺻﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ.
2 !3(V-WIN)awgwbwc -cwbawcwJ 3 3(TYPE)1(Y=)dvx-cw vxw 4 5(SET)-dwdwbwJ )5 6(TABL )6 5(G • CON • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. kﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ T+Gﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .TABLE .2ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. .3ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ T+Gﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ. .4ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. .
.8ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻫﺎﻡ ! • ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-7400GIIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺛﻢ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ .ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻛﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .DYNA .2ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. .3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ.
ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ .4 2 1 → ← ↑↓ 3 4 → ← kﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ. .2ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. .3ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻝ "ﻣﻮﺿﻊ". .4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ .
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ DOT ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ – Xﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ،ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻝ =Yﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !m(SET UPﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ cccﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ =Yﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ. .3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ) … 1(Normﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ – ) .Xﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ( ) … 2(Highﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ –) .Xﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ( .
.2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ. }ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ 3(TYPE) 1(an) ...{an }ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ-ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻮﺩﻱ{ 2(an+1)... }ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ-ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﻮﺩﻱ{ 3(an+2)... .3ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ. .4ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻝ . nﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻻﻭﹼﻝ، ﻭ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﻀﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ. .5ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ.
1 m RECUR 2 !3(V-WIN)awgwbwc -bfwgfwfwJ 3 3(TYPE)2(an+1)c2(an)+bw 4 5(SET)2(a1)bwgwbwJ )J (5 1(SEL+S)f2 )6 6(TABL )7 5(G • CON • ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ. • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Aﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).
)5 6(TABL )6 3(PHAS • ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RECURﻭ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ، ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ .ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ، ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ) 3(PHASﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ. ) ....... 1(a • bﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) bn (bn+1, bn+2ﻭ )an (an+1, an+2 ) ....... 2(b • cﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) cn (cn+1, cn+2ﻭ )bn (bn+1, bn+2 ) .......
kﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ،ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺪ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) y = f(xﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ an+1 = y, an = xﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﲔ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ) an+1 = f(anﺍﳌﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ . an+1, anﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .RECUR .2ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. .3ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ. .4ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ،ﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ،ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮ. .
.10ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﻫﺎﻡ! • ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-7400GIIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ .CONICS kﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ CONICSﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻭ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ .ﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .CONICS .2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )} ....1(RECTﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ{ )} ....2(POLﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ{ )} ....3(PARMﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ{ .
.1ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،أدﺧﻞ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .2ﺣﺮك اﻋﺪادات ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻌﺮض. .3ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد ،اﺳﺘﺨﺪم إﻋﺪاد "ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ اﳋﻂ" ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﳕﻂ اﳋﻂ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ. ) ( ) Norm … 1اﻹﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ اﻷوﻟﻲ( ) ( ) Thick … 2ﺿﻌﻒ اﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ (Norm ) ( ) Broken … 3ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﻣﻜﺴﻮر( ) ( ) Dot … 4ذو ﻧﻘﻄﺔ( .4ادﺧﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .5ارﺳﻢ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .6اﺧﺘﺮ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ*1. ﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ!4(SKTCH) 1(Cls) ... ﺧﻂ اﳌﻤﺎس 2(Tang) ... اﳋﻂ اﻟﻌﺎدي ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ 3(Norm) ...
4 3(TYPE)1(Y=)v(v+c)(v -c)w )5 6(DRAW )6 !4(SKTCH)2(Tang 7 e~ew*1 *1ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﳑﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ” “ ﻭ ﺿﻐﻂ .w .12ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ kﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .2ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .3ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ،!1(TRCEﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ*1. .
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .GRAPH .2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ .3ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ) ، !1(TRCEﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ. kﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﻄﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ ،ﳑﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
- yﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ 4(Y-ICPT)... 5(ISCT) ... I ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﺮﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ -yﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ 6(g)1(Y-CAL) ... x - yﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ - xﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ 6(g)2(X-CAL) ... x ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ 6(g)3(∫dx) ... .4ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ) (kﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ .ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ. .
• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ )f(x) type ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ ) (Y > f(x), Y < f(x), Y t f(x) or Y s f(xﻓﻘﻂ. • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﲔ. -ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻘﻼﺏ. kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ ﺗﺒﲔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ y-ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ xﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ x-ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ .y ﹼ .1ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. .
ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ).(–2 ,0 )Y1 = x(x + 2)(x – 2 • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ .10- • ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ. • ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ. kﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﻫﺎﻡ ! • ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-7400GIIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ .
uﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ][G-SLV]-[FOCS]/[LEN ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ (Y – 2)2 + 3 = X ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺎﻡ ! ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹼ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ .ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻪ، ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .ﻷﻥ ،ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ،ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻰﺀ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ. .
• ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ List 1ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﺍﳌﻔﺮﺩ ،ﻭ List 1ﻭ List 2ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ x-ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.y- • ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ. ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ ،ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( .
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ )ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ( ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ • ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ( • }} ... {LISTﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ {26 • ﻋﺮﺽ )ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ( • } ... {%}/{Dataﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ}ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ{}/ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ{ • ) % Sto Memﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( • } ...
Pie, 1-Sample Z Test, 2-Sample Z Test, 1-Prop Z Test, 2-Prop Z Test, 1-Sample t Test, 2)ﺗﻬﻤﻞ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ– xﻓﻘﻂ( Sample t Test, χ2 GOF Test, χ2 2-way Test, 2-Sample F Test • ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ) x-ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2 ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ) y-ﻋﺮﺿﻲ( .ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ x/yﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ . .2ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ .
⇒ )w(DRAW ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ – ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ .ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ) (Q1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ) ،(Q3ﻣﻊ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ) .(Medﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ )ﺍﳌﺴﻤﺎﺓ (whiskersﺍﳌﻤﺘﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﻧﻰ ) (minXﺃﻗﺼﻰ ) (maxXﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
kﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ. ﻳﺤﺪﺩ XListﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ Freqﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ .ﻭﲢﺪﺩ 1ﻝ Freq ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ. kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺪﺭﹼﺝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ XListﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ Freqﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ. ﻭﲢﺪﺩ 1ﻝ Freqﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ.
• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(DRAWﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ. • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎ ﹰ. • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ Q1Q3ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻣﺎ ”) “Stdﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ”) “OnDataﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ( ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ Q1ﻭ .Q3 ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ” “Stdﺃﻭ ” ، “OnDataﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻝ"ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Stdﻭ " "OnDataﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ 9 7 8 ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ 5 6 4 3 2 1 ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ 2+3 = Q1 2 7+8 = Q3 2 • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ Q1ﻭ Q3ﻭ Medﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ. } = Q1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.25ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ {0.25 ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ 0.25ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ،ﺗﻜﻮﻥ Q1ﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
OnData u ﻗﻴﻢ Q1ﻭ Q3ﻭ Medﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ. } = Q1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.25ﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ {0.25 } = Q3ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ 0.75ﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ {0.75 ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﳌﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ. )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ(10 : ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ 1 1 1 1/10 = 0.1 2 1 2 2/10 = 0.2 3 2 4 4/10 = 0.
.3ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ kﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ xy ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ . xy .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ .2ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .3ﺣﺪﺩ )Scatﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ( ﺍﻭ ) xyﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ (xy ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ A Jﺃﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
اﳌﺜﺎل ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎدﺧﺎل ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮة ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ و ﺧﻄﻂ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ رﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺮق ،ﺛﻢ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄداء اﻟﺘﺮاﺟﻊ اﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼت اﻟﺘﺮاﺟﻊ ،و ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ارﺳﻢ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ اﻟﺘﺮاﺟﻌﻲ اﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ. ) xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( 0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 ) yﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( –2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4 1 m STAT 2 a.fwb.cwc.ewewf.cwe -c.bwa.dwb.fwcwc.ew )1(GRPH)6(SET)c1(Scat)J1(GPH1 )3 1(CALC)6(g)2(Log )4 6(DRAW • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺟﺮاء وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ اﻟﺘﺮاﺟﻌﻲ .ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﺟﺮاء ﲤﺮﻳﺮ اﺛﺮي.
kﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). 6(DRAW kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ) y-ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ y-ﻋﻨﺪ x = 0ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺮ(. ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ.
اﻟﺘﺮاﺟﻊ اﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ اﻟﺘﺮاﺟﻊ اﳌﻜﻌﺐ ........ y = ax3 + bx2 + cx + dﳕﻂ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻟﻠﺘﺮاﺟﻊ a ......... ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮاﺟﻊ b ......... ﻣﻌﻤﻞ اول ﻟﻠﺘﺮاﺟﻊ c ......... ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮاﺟﻊ d ......... )اﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ(y- ............ y = ax2 + bx + cﳕﻂ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮاﺟﻊ a ......... ﻣﻌﻤﻞ أول ﻟﻠﺘﺮاﺟﻊ b ......... ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮاﺟﻊ c ......... )اﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ(y- اﻟﺘﺮاﺟﻊ اﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ ................. y = ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + eﳕﻂ اﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﻌﻤﻞ راﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺮاﺟﻊ a ...........
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻦ yﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻝ .xﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ، y = a × xb ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﻧﺎ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻧﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ = yﻓﻲ × a + bﻓﻲ . xﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ ،ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ = x ﻓﻲ ، xﻭ = yﻓﻲ , yﻭ = Aﻓﻲ ،aﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ .Y = A + bX )1(CALC)6(g)4(Pwr )6(DRAW ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ. y = a·x ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ a............. ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ b.................
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) "“List 1ﺍﻟﻰ" ("List 26ﻝ ."“Resid Listﻭ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ. ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ. ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ .
.4ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﰎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ. uﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )2(CALC)6(SET ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ. ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ) xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1Var XList ..........
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )2(CALC)2(2VAR ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ cﻭ fﻟﻴﻤﺮﹼﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ. ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(6-15 kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ "ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ" ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ" ،ﰎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .
n 2 ))Σ (y – (ax + b i i i=1 n 2 )) Σ (y – (a + bx i i i=1 n + bxi + c))2 Σ (y – (ax 2 i i i=1 n )) Σ (y – (ax + bx + cx + d 2 2 i i 3 i i i=1 n + cxi2 + dxi + e))2 3 Σ (y – (ax + bx i 4 i i i=1 n )) Σ (y – (a + b ln x 2 i i i=1 n 2 )) Σ (ln y – (ln a + bx i i i=1 n
.3ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ vﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ. • ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. • ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ” “Coordﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ. • ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ Y-CALﻣﻊ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ .
kﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ -ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ .(RUN ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(PROB))K6(g)3(PROBﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ 6(g)(fx-7400GIIIﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ،ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • }( ... {P(}/{Q(}/{Rﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ }) {P(t)}/{Q(t)}/{R(tﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ. • }(} ... {tﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟـ ){t(x • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ) P(t) ،Q(t) ،R(tﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻝ ) t(xﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
.4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ,mﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ ،(RUNﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )K6(g)3(PROB )) 2(PROBﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GIIIﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ) (PROBﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. 3(PROB)*6(g)4(t() bga.f)w )* fx-7400GIII: 2(PROB )ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ tﻝ 160.5ﺳﻢ( ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ–1.633855948 : )( –1.634 4(t() bhf.f)w )ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ tﻝ 175.5ﺳﻢ( ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ0.4963343361 : )( 0.496 )1(P()a.ejg1(P()-b.gde)w )ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻤﻮﻋﺔ( ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ0.638921 : )ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻤﻮﻋﺔ (63.
.1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .RUN • MAT .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ. )K5(STAT)3(DIST)1(NORM 1(Npd)!*( { )b,c,d !/( } ),b.f,c)w • ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-32 kﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺻﺼﺔ .ﻭ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ .
kﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ TEST ﻫﺎﻡ! • ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GIII ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ (RUNﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ PRGMﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﳌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ STATﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ، Zﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،tﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .
-1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ. -2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ. -1ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﺎﺡ. -2ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ. ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ .
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ" ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. • ) ... 1(CALCﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ • ) ... 6(DRAWﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ • ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. kﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ Z uﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .Z • ) ...
• ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ μﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2 -2 uﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ -2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ. ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ. )3(TEST )1(Z )2(2-S ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ......... μ1≠μ2ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ............. sx1ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .............
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ≠ .............0.5ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ • ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ xﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2 -2 uﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Z ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ-2 .ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ Zﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ. ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ. )3(TEST )1(Z )4(2-P ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ p1>p2............ • ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ p1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .
ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ– pﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(Pﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ. • ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ tﻭ pﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ Pﻭ Tﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ. -1 uﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ -1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ tﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ . t ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ. )3(TEST )2(t )1(1-S ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ........ μ1≠μ2ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .............. spﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻊ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ. • ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ μ1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2 LinearReg uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t ﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ-ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺯﻭﺍﺝ ) (x, yﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ a, bﺍﻷﻧﺴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ .y = a + bxﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ،tﻭ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ xﻭ .
ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ] [Resid Listﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. • ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻝ LinearRegﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .t • ] [Save Resﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ β & ρﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ .2 • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑـ ]ﺣﻔﻆ [Resﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ] [Resid Listﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ] [Resid Listﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ .....................CNTRBﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻫﻤﺔ. uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ χ2 ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻭ ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ χ2ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻉ )ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﺔ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ /ﻻ(. ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ. )3(TEST )3(CHI )2(2WAY ﺛﻢ ،ﺣ ﹼﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ.
ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ. )3(TEST )4(F ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ........ σ1≠σ2ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ .............. x¯1ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. .............. x¯2ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ :ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ . • ) ... 1(Fﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ .
ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ. )3(TEST )5(ANOV ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ...............ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ) ANOVAﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ............... Aﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26 ﺗﺎﺑﻊ .....................ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ (26 1 .......... Save Resﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﺍﻟﻰ * (22 ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ .............
ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ......... (A) 1ﻋﺎﻣﻞ Aﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، dfﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، SSﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، SMﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، Fﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔp- ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .....(ERR) 2ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، dfﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،SSﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ .MS ANOVAﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ......... (A) 1ﻋﺎﻣﻞ Aﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،dfﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،SSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،MSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،Fﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔp- ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ......... (B) 2ﻋﺎﻣﻞ df Bﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،SSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،MSﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،Fﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔp- ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .......
) ANOVA kﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ( uﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ :ﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ) (Aﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ) . (Bﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ . B2 )ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ( B )ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( A B1 132 ، 116 139 ، 113 A1 122 ، 131 126 ، 133 A2 ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯ ﻣﻦ .
uﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ uﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ 6-36
.6ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻫﺎﻡ! • ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GIII ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ )ﻓﺎﺻﻞ( ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ. ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ( .ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻴﻖ ،ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻳﺤﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻗﺔ .ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ 95%ﻭ .
kﻓﺎﺻﻞ Z -1 uﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Z -1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Zﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ. )4(INTR )1(Z )1(1-S ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ -2 uﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Z -2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Zﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ.
ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ -2 uﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Z -2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ Zﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ. ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ. )4(INTR )1(Z )4(2-P kﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ t -1 uﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ t ﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ.
-2 uﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ t -2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ tﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ tﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ .t ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ. )4(INTR )2(t )2(2-S .7ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﺎﻡ! • ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GIII ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ،ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ "ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ" ،ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ .
ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ • 5(DIST)1(NORM) ... ( 6-41 ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ) t-ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 2(t) ... (6-43 ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ) χ2ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 3(CHI) ... (6-44 ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ) Fﺻﻔﺤﺔ 4(F) ... (6-45 ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 5(BINM) ... (6-46 ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 6(g)1(POISN) ... (6-48 ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 6(g)2(GEO) ... (6-49 ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ 6(g)3(H.GEO) ... (6-51 ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ" ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. • ) ...
• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ. • ﲢﺪﻳﺪ σ = 1ﻭ μ = 0ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔx- ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. uﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ )5(DIST)1(NORM)2(Ncd ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ،ﻣﺎ ﺑﲔ ﺣﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻭﺣﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ.
f (x)dx = p Upper Lower ∫ f (x)dx = p ∞+ Lower ∫ f (x)dx = p ﺫﻳﻞ :ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻳﻞ :ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻲ ﺍﻻﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ. ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ. ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ. Upper ∫ ∞− ﺫﻳﻞ :ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ. • ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ∞ = 1E99, –∞ = –1E99 : • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ.
• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. uﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐt- )5(DIST)2(t)3(Invt ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺳﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ t-ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻴﻮﺩﻧﺖ t-ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ df )ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ(. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. uﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2 ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ χ2ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ χ2ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ) dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ(. )5(DIST)3(CHI)3(InvC ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ .
uﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ F )5(DIST)4(F)2(Fcd ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ Fﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ F ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) (xﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ x-ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ . uﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ )5(DIST)5(BINM)2(Bcd ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ.
ﻫﺎﻡ! ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ) ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ` ( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ. ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻭ `) xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ `( .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xInvﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ xInvﻭ ،`xInvﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ. uﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ )5(DIST)6(g)1(POISN)3(InvP ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ.
ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ. uﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ )5(DIST)6(g)2(GEO)2(Gcd ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ.
ﻫﺎﻡ! ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ) ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ `( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ. ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )xInvﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻭ `xInv )ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ `( .ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xInvﻓﻘﻂ .ﻟﻜﻦ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ xInvﻭ ، `xInvﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ.
uﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ )5(DIST)6(g)3(H.GEO)3(InvH ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )(x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ • ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ.
ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ )-1ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ...... (Zﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )” “≠ p0ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ -ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ، ” “< p0ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺩﻧﻲ “> p0”،ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ -ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ( -2) p1ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ........... (Zﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )” “≠ pﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ – ﺍﺛﻨﲔ، ” “< p2ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ – ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﺍﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ “> p2” ، 2 ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ-ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ .(2 -1) μﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ...............
ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ...............................ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ( ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ( ) xﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..............................ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) σﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..............................ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻤﺜﻠﺔ )(σ > 0 ) μﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..............................ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ )(μ > 0 ﺍﺩﻧﻲ )ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ..........................ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ )ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( .........................ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ) dfﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( .............................ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ )(df > 0 ) n:dfﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ......................
ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
kﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ :ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ )ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ( ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳝﲔ :ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ( -1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ Z 'o + Z (α /2) · σ/ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= n -2ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ Z ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= (o1 – o2) + Z(α /2) σ12/n1 + σ22/n2 -1ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ Z ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= ))x/n + Z(α /2) 1/n · (x/n · (1 – x/n ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ،ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= )(x1/n1 – x2/n2 -2ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ Z + Z(α /2) (x1/n1 · (1 – x1/n1))/n1 + (x2/n2 · (1 – x2/n2))/n2 -1ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ t 'o + tn−1(α /2) · sx/
ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ Upper p(x)dx ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ∞– ∫ ∞ =p p(x)dx Lower ﺫﻳﻞ = ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ∫ Upper =p p(x)dx Lower ﺫﻳﻞ = ﳝﲔ ∫ =p ﺫﻳﻞ = ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐt- ∞ p(x)dx ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ χ2 Lower ∫ =p ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ F kﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ( ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ :nﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ :μﺗﻌﻨﻲ ) (μ > 0 ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ )··· (x = 1, 2, 3, × N – MC n – x NC n ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )(TVM ﻫﺎﻡ! • ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-7400GIIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ .TVM .1ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ TVMﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ.
kﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ TVM ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) 6(GRPHﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ. • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1(TRCEﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ، ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ .ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ eﻳﻌﺮﺽ SFV ,SI ,PVﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ. • ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼت ،اﺳﺘﺨﺪم واﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة ادﻧﺎه ﻷداء اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ. }ﻓﺎﺋﺪة ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ{ … }• {SI }ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ{ … }• {SFV • ﻳﺤﺪث ﺧﻄﺄ ) (Ma ERRORاذا ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ اﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼت ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎورة ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎت ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. }ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼت اﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼت{ … }• {REPT }رﺳﻢ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{ … }• {GRPH ﺑﻌﺪ رﺳﻢ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1(TRCEﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ وﻗﺮاءة ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
I %u ) iﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ( ) iﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ( ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ. PV + α × PMT + β × FV = 0 ﺍﻟﻰ I %ﻣﻦ ) iﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ( {{ )i × 100 ................................. (P/Y = C/Y = 1 } )ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ( –1 × C/Y × 100... P/Y C/Y ) (1+ i ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ FV ............... = I% ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ n............... ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ P/Y .............. ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ I% ............ ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ C/Y..........
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ. }ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ{ … }• {n }ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ{ … }• {I% } ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ { ) ﻗﺮﺽ :ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ :ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ( … }• {PV } ﺩﻓﻊ { ) ﻗﺮﺽ :ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ،ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ :ﺍﻳﺪﺍﻉ ( … }• {PMT } ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ { ) ﻗﺮﺽ :ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻉ ،ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ :ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ( … }• {FV } ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ { … }• {AMT • ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ) (Ma ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻻﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﺪﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﺻﻠﻴﺎ.
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ) (Ma ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. }} … {REPTﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{ }} … {GRPHﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !1(TRCEﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ. .
ﻋﻼﻣﺔ b : PRNPM1 = PMT + BALPM1–1 × i c : BALPM2 = BALPM2–1 + PRNPM2 PM2 d : Σ PRN = PRNPM1 + PRNPM1+1 + … + PRNPM2 PM1 e : Σ INT = INTPM1 + INTPM1+1 + … + INTPM2 PM2 PM1 ) ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ BAL0 = PV (INT1 = 0 and PRN1 = PMT uﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ )ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ I%ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ)‘(I% ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ
• } } … { ΣINTﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ PM1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ { PM2 • } } … {ΣPRNﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ PM1ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ { PM2 • } } … {CMPDﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ { • ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ) (Ma ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.
ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ. • } } … {'EFFﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ { • } } … {'APRﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ { • ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ) (Ma ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. • } } … {REPTﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ { .
ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. • } } … {REPTﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ { .8ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ /ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﲔ ،ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﺧﺮ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 2(DAYSﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ /ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )6(g)2(DAYS .......... d1ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ 1 .......... d2ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ 2 .......... Dﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻻ d1ﺍﻭ .
.9ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﺿﻪ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ) ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻱ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ. • ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ – ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ) ، (SLﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ – ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ) ، (FPﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ– ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ – ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ ) ، (SYDﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ – ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ). (DB • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﳌﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻭﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻨﺔ .
uﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ -ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ )(DB :ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ j DBj : RDVjﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ j : I%ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ I% Y–1 × 100n 12 × DB1 = PV RDV1 = PV – FV – DB1 I% 100n × ) DBj = (RDVj–1 + FV RDVj = RDVj–1 – DBj )({Y–1}≠12 DBn +1 = RDVn )({Y–1}≠12 RDVn+1 = 0 ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(DEPRﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ .
• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ) (Ma ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. • } } … {REPTﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ { • } } … {TABLﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ { • } } … {GRPHﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ { .10ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ. ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" "ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ .
• ﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ CPN CPN M × A D M + ) (k–1+B/D ) RDV N YLD/100 M –Σ k=1 (1+ ) (N–1+B/D CST = PRC + INT uﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ) YLD/100 M – = PRC (1+ CPN M × A D – = INT )(YLD ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 4(BONDﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 2ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ. )6(g)4(BOND ..........
MEMOﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ MEMO • ﹼ ....PRDﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ d1ﺍﻟﻰ d2 ......... Nﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ ......... Aﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻘﺔ ......... Bﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )(-D-A ........ Dﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ • ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ MEMOﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ) (CPDﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ .
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻫﺎﻡ! ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ PRGMﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ/ﺍﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ. .1ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ،ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ. .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ PRGMﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ PRGMﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ. ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .2ﹼ .
4 1(EXE) or w A = 7ﻋﻨﺪ S A = 7ﻋﻨﺪ V )hw(Value of A w ww Sﻋﻨﺪ A = 10 Vﻋﻨﺪ A = 10 baw w ww Sﻋﻨﺪ A = 15 Vﻋﻨﺪ A = 15 bfw w*1 *1ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. • ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺍﻭ (RUNﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ : >" wﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ<" .
• }*{STAT}/{MAT}*/{LIST}/{GRPH}/{DYNA}*/{TABL}/{RECR } ...ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺀ { } /ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ { } /ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ { } /ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ { } /ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ { } /ﺟﺪﻭﻝ { } /ﻋﻮﺩﻳﺔ { ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ { • } } ... {A↔aﹼ ﺪﺩﺓ { • } } ... {CHARﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﺸ ﹼ * ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-7400GIII • ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) !J(PRGMﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ) (PRGMﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • } } ... {COMﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ { • } } ...
.3ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ kﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ "ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺱ" ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ" .ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ. • ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. • ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺗﻚ. uﻟﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ،ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺷﺊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ .ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ*1. .4ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(SRCﺍﻭ wﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ*2. *1ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ" ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. *2ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ،ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ. • ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ )_( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )^( ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
kﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ uﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻲ ﺑـ .OCTA .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(g)1(SRCﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. )6(g)1(SRC )j(O)I(C)/(T .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ. • ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ .
ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ __r __t __s __q __p __x __d __+ __- r θ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ /ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ " ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ /ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ × ÷ + − • ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ. ) 'Program Mode :RUNﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (RUN ) 'Program Mode :BASEﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (BASE • ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ .
uﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻫﺎﻡ! ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﲢﺖ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﹰ ﻛﺎﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ،ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ .ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-6 ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ .ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ .
.5ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ kﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ 8-12 ....................................................Break 8-19 ................................ CloseComport38k 8-15 ............................................. ClrGraph 8-16 .................................................. ClrList 8-16 .................................................. ClrMat 8-16 ................................................ ClrText 8-16 .................................................. ClrVct 8-16 ..........
kﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ? )ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< → ? ">ﻃﻠﺐ<" >,ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< → ? ﻣﺜﺎﻝ? → A : ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ: • ﻳﻌﻄﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻭﻳﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺐ ،ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ "?" ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺎ ﹼ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ .ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺐ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "?>ﻃﻠﺐ<" ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ .ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺺ ﺣﺘﻰ 255ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻠﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ.
kﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )(COM If~Then~(Else~)IfEnd ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ Then-ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ If-ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ( .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ Else- ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ If-ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ) .(0ﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﹼ ﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ IfEnd-ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻥ Then-ﺃﻭ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻥ.
Do~LpWhile ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ(. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: >ﺣﺎﻟﺔ< ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ LpWhile _ : ^ >ﺑﻴﺎﻥ< _ : ^ Do ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ: • ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ( .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ )،(0 ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻥ.LpWhile- • ﲟﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ،LpWhile-ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ )ﺍﳌﻔﺤﻮﺻﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ.
Prog ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺃﻭ ،(RUNﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ"_ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ" Prog ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝProg "ABC"_ : ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ: • ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ،ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ. • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ.
kﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ )(JUMP Dsz ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻫﻮ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ،1ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮﺍ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ≠ 0 >ﺑﻴﺎﻥ< _ : ^ >ﺑﻴﺎﻥ< > :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< Dsz ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ = 0 ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ A :ﺍﻟﻰ θ ،r ،Z ]ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ[ : Dsz Bﻳﻨﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ Bﺑـ .1 ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ،1ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮﻫﺎ )ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ( .
⇒ )ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ( ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ.
ClrList ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ< ClrList ClrList ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1 :ﺍﻟﻰ Ans ،26 ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑـ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺷﻴﺊ ﻟـ"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ". )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GIII ClrMat ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ.
ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ DrawFTG-Con, DrawFTG-Plt ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ. ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ: • ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. • DrawFTG-Conﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﹰ ﻣﺘﺼﻼ،ﻋﻨﺪ DrawFTG-Pltﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻧﻘﻄﻴﺎ ﹰ. ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ DrawGraph ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ. ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GIII PlotPhase ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ x-ﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ.y- ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ>,
Locate ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
Receive38k / Send38k ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ 38ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ< Send38k >ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< >ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ< Receive38k ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ: • ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ OpenComport38kﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ. • ﻳﺠﻞ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ CloseComport38kﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﹰ ،ﺳﻴﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ.
(Exp ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ،ﻭ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>"[)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(Exp (Exp'Str ﻳﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ. ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻭ ﹼ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>[)] :ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ< >,ﺻﻴﻐﺔ<(Exp'Str ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) ،(Yn, r, Xt, Yt, Xﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ )an, an+1, an+2, bn, bn+1, bn+2, (cn, cn+1, cn+2ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) (fnﻛﺤﺠﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ )>ﺻﻴﻐﺔ<(.
(StrMid ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ n-ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻝ m-ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ. ) n ،0 < n < 9999ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>", n [,m)] :ﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(StrMid ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ :ﺣﺬﻑ " "mﺳﻴﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ nﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ. (StrRight ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻨﺴﺞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ nﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ. ) n ،0 < n < 9999ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ>", n[)] :ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ<"(StrRight (StrRotate ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ .
kﺁﺧﺮ RclCapt ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ :ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ. )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ 1 :ﺍﻟﻰ (20 ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ> :ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ< RclCapt .6ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ kﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺭﻓﺎﻗﻪ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ .ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ،ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ.
uﳌﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﲔ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 1 )(Swap ﳌﺒﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﺼﻒ 2ﻭﺻﻒ 3ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ: ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ = A 2 1 4 3 6 5 ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ _Swap A, 2, 3 Mat A ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. uﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 2 )(`Row ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 2ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ 4 ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.
uﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ 4 )(Row+ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ 2ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ 3ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ 1 ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. _Row+ A, 2, 3 ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ Mat A kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ .ﻭﻳﹸﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
>ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ>, ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< PxlOn >ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< PxlOff >ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< PxlChg >ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< PxlTest ">ﻧﺺ<" >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< Text >ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ< >,ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳋﻂ< Text >ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< SketchThick >ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< SketchBroken >ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< SketchDot >ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ< SketchNormal >ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ>, ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺔ>,
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ .ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻋﺎ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. • ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ • ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂDrawFTG-Con_ : _1 → F Start ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂDrawFTG-Plt_ : _5 → F End _1 → F pitch • ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ _DispF-Tbl • ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ >ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ< ...
kﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﹸﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ .ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﳌﹸﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. >ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ< ... Fileﺭﻗﻢ 1 :ﺇﻟﻰ 6 kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ.
• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ.xy _ S-Gph1 DrawOn, Scatter, List 1, List 2, 1, Square ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳋﻂ ،xyﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ " "Scatterﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑـ"."xyLine • ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ. _ S-Gph1 DrawOn, NPPlot, List 1, Square • ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GIII ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. uﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ]DrawDistNorm , [,σ, μ 1 ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ *1 *1 1 4151 * 1ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ .ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ μ = 0ﻭ .
uﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ χ2 ]DrawDistChi , , [df 1 ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ 1 4153 x dx 2 – × e –1 df df 2 2 × x 1 2 × 1 df Γ 2 Upper Lower ∫ =p • ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ DrawDistChiﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ Lower < x < Upperﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ LinearReg(ax+b) List1, List 2, List 3 1 ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ* ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )(Frequency ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ(YList) y- ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ(XList) x- 1 416611 * ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. ) ............. LinearReg(ax+bﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ )ﻧﻮﻉ (ax+b ) ............. LinearReg(a+bxﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ )ﻧﻮﻉ (a+bx Med-Med .................. Med-MedLineﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ............................ QuadRegﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ...........................
( :NormCDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ (pﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐNormCD(Lower, Upper[, σ, μ)] : • ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،pﻭ ،ZLowﻭ ZUp ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ،pﻭ ،ZLowﻭ .ZUpﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ pﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻟـ ListAns) Ansﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ(. ( :InvNormCDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )ﻗﻴﻢ( ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ /ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ( ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ .
( :ChiCDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ) χ2ﻗﻴﻤﺔ (pﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐChiCD(Lower,Upper,df [)] : • ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ .ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ pﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ pﻭ ListAns) Ansﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ(. ( :InvChiCDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ) χ2ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ .p ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐInvChiCD(p,df [)] : • ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ .pﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ xInvﻭ ListAns) Ans ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ pﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(.
uﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ ( :PoissonPDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ (pﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐPoissonPD(x, μ[)] : • ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ .xﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ pﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ pﻭ Ans ) ListAnsﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ xﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(. ( :PoissonCDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ (pﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐPoissonCD(X,μ[)] : • ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ .Xﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ pﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ p ﻭ ListAns) Ansﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ Xﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(.
( :InvHypergeoCDﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐInvHypergeoCD(p, n, M, N[)] : • ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ .pﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ Xﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ xInvﻭ ListAns) Ansﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ pﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(. kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ TESTﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ (fx-7400GIII • ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﳊﺠﺔ " "μ conditionﻟﻸﻣﺮ.
uﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t :OneSampleTTestﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ 1-ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.t- OneSampleTTest "μ condition", μ0, o, sx, n ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: ]OneSampleTTest "μ condition", μ0, List[, Freq ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ: ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ t, p, o, sx, nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .5 :TwoSampleTTestﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ t-ﻟﻌﻴﻨﺘﲔ.
ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ: ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ F, p, o1, o2, sx1, sx2, n1, n2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ListAnsﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .8 ANOVA u :OneWayANOVA ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ: ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ANOVAﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ. OneWayANOVA List1, List2 )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 1ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ) (Aﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 2ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(. Adf, Ass, Ams, AF, Ap, ERRdf, ERRss, ERRmsﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ .
uﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺠﺔ ،ﺃﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )."(TVM • ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ. :Smpl_SI )Smpl_SI(n, I%, PV ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: :Smpl_SFV ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ. )Smpl_SFV(n, I%, PV • ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: • ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ P/Yﻭ C/Yﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ،ﲡﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ P/Y=12ﻭ .
• ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ .PM2 :Amt_BAL )Amt_BAL(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: :Amt_INT ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: :Amt_PRN ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: :Amt_ΣINT ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: :Amt_ΣPRN ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ: ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻌﺔ .PM1 )Amt_INT(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﻓﻌﺔ .PM1 )Amt_PRN(PM1, PM2, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ PM1ﺍﻟﻰ .
ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ.7 .
[ns] [hp] hp [ft•lbf/s] ft•lbf/s [Btu/min] Btu/min sinh_ cosh_ tanh_ sinh –1_ cosh –1_ tanh –1_ ! P C Ran#_ RanInt#( RanNorm#( RanBin#( RanList#( P( Q( R( t( Abs_ Int_ Frac_ Rnd Intg_ RndFix( GCD( LCM( MOD( MOD_Exp( ° r g Pol( Rec( ' DMS m µ n p f k M G T P E StoPict_ RclPict_ fn _And_ _Or_ Not_ Xor_ RclCapt_ Smpl_SI( Smpl_SFV( Cmpd_n( Cmpd_I%( Ran# Int Norm Bin List [lb] [slug] [ton(short)] [ton(long)] [N] [lbf] [tonf] [dyne] [kgf] [Pa] [kPa] [mmH2O] [mmHg] [atm] [inH 2O] [inHg] [lbf/in²] [bar] [kgf/cm
b2 b2 c0 c0 c1 c1 c2 c2 anStart anSt bnStart bnSt cnStart cnSt R_Result Reslt Sim_Result S-Rlt Sim_Coef S-Cof Ply_Result P-Rlt Ply_Coef P-Cof n n I% I% PV PV PMT PMT FV FV P/Y P/Y C/Y C/Y EQUA TVM Str_ Str !J (PRGM) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ 3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ If_ Then_ Else_ IfEnd For_ _To_ _Step_ Next While_ WhileEnd Do LpWhile_ Prog_ Return Break Stop Lbl_ Goto_ If Then Else I-End For To Step Next Whle WEnd Do Lp-W Prog Rtrn Brk Stop Lbl Goto ⇒ Isz_ Dsz_ Me
Graph_ ∫ G-∫dx Y> Graph_Y> Y< Graph_Y< Graph_Yt Yt Graph_Ys Ys X> Graph_X> X< Graph_X< Graph_Xt Xt Graph_Xs Xs Plot Plot_ PlotOn_ Pl-On PlotOff_ Pl-Off PlotChg_ Pl-Chg Line Line F-Line_ F-Line Circle_ Vertical_ Horizontal_ Text_ On PxlOn_ Off PxlOff_ Chg PxlChg_ PxlTest( SketchNormal_ ⎯ — SketchThick_ ····· SketchBroken_ ······ SketchDot_ S-L-Dot G-Connect LINE Crcl Vert Hztl Text PIXL 4 (MENU) ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ d h b o Neg_ Not_ and or xor xnor 'Dec 'Hex 'Bin 'Oct 3 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ2 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ1 ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ d h b o N
1-S OneSampleZTest_ 2-S TwoSampleZTest_ 1-P OnePropZTest_ 2-P TwoPropZTest_ 1-S OneSampleTTest_ 2-S TwoSampleTTest_ REG LinRegTTest_ GOF ChiGOFTest_ ChiTest_ 2-WAY TwoSampleFTest_ 1-W OneWayANOVA_ 2-W TwoWayANOVA_ p p z z t t Chi χ2 F F p̂ p̂ p̂ 1 p̂ 1 p̂ 2 p̂ 2 df df se se r r r2 r2 pa pa Fa Fa Adf Adf SSa SSa MSa MSa pb pb Fb Fb Bdf Bdf SSb SSb MSb MSb pab pab Fab Fab ABdf ABdf SSab SSab MSab MSab Edf Edf SSe SSe MSe MSe Left Left Right Right p̂ p̂ p̂ 1 p̂ 1 p̂ 2 p̂ 2 df df p p xInv xInv x1Inv x1Inv x2Inv
.8ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ⇔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ. ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(8-6 ﻫﺎﻡ! • ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻲ )_( ﺍﳌﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
.• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ " " ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ f femto 7 7 m m p pico 8 8 n n n nano 9 9 o o μ micro : : p p m milli ; ; q q k kilo < < r r M Mega = = s s G Giga > > t t T Tera ? ? u u P Peta @ @ v v E Exa A A w w ^ Disps B B x x ↵ (CR) C C y y → -> D D z z E Exp E E { { ≤ <= F F | | ≠ <> G G } } ≥ >= H H ~ ˜ ⇒ => I I Pol( f1 f1 J J sin sin f2 f2 K K cos
ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ ∑xy Int Int Not Not Plot ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ Sigmaxy ReP ReP Plot ImP ImP ^ ^ d/dx( d/dx( × ¼ Lbl Lbl d2/dx2( d^2/dx^2( or or Fix Fix Solve( Solve( ! ! Sci Sci Σ( Sigma( r rad Dsz Dsz FMin( FMin( minY minY Isz Isz FMax( FMax( minX minX Factor Factor Seq( Seq( n Statn ViewWindow ViewWindow Min( Min( Goto Goto Mean( Mean( Prog sinh−1 sinh^−1 cosh−1 cosh^−1 tanh−1 tanh^−1 Line Line Median( Median( Graph Y= Graph Y= Sol
ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ List4 List4 Σbn+2 Sigmabn+2 MSab MSab List5 List5 Σcn+ Sigmacn+2 [ns] [ns] List6 List6 Int÷ Int/ [μs] [micros] Q1 Q1 Rmdr Rmdr [ms] [ms] Q3 Q3 Fa Fa [s] [s] x1 x1 n1 n1 [min] [min] y1 y1 n2 n2 [h] [h] x2 x2 x̄1 x-bar1 [day] [day] y2 y2 x̄2 x-bar2 [week] [week] x3 x3 sx1 sx1 [yr] [yr] y3 y3 sx2 sx2 [s-yr] [s-yr] sp Sxp [t-yr] [t-yr] [ C] [Centigrade] 2 Vct Vct logab( logab( p̂ p-hat RndFix(
ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ [yd] [fath] [fath] For [rd] [rd] [mile] [mile] [n mile] [n_mile] [acre] [acre] [ha] [ha] [cm2] [cm^2] [m2] [m^2] [km2] [km^2] Return [in2] [in^2] [ft2] [ft^2] [yd2] [yd^2] [mile2] [mile^2] Send( Send( Dot Dot [m/s] [m/s] Receive( Receive( Scatter Scatter [km/h] [km/h] OpenComport38k OpenComport38k xyLine xyLine [ft/s] [ft/s] CloseComport38k CloseComport38k Hist Hist [mile/h] [mile/h] Send38k Send38k MedBox MedBox [knot
ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ VarRange DerivOn DerivOn DrawDistT DrawDistT Q1Q3TypeOnData Q1Q3TypeOnData LocusOn LocusOn DrawDistChi DrawDistChi ΣdispOn SigmadispOn DrawDistF DrawDistF VarRange SketchNormal SketchNormal SketchThick SketchThick SketchBroken SketchDot G SelOn G SelOn None None SketchBroken T SelOn T SelOn StickLength StickLength SketchDot D SelOn D SelOn StickHoriz StickHoriz R SelOn R SelOn IneqTypeOr IneqTypeOr Graph X> anType anType an+1Type
ﺃﻣﺮ ﻧﺺ Smpl_SI( Smpl_SI( Smpl_SFV( Smpl_SFV( Cmpd_n( Cmpd_n( Cmpd_I%( Cmpd_I%( Cmpd_PV( Cmpd_PV( Cmpd_PMT( Cmpd_PMT( Cmpd_FV( Cmpd_FV( Cash_NPV( Cash_NPV( Cash_IRR( Cash_IRR( Cash_PBP( Cash_PBP( Cash_NFV( Cash_NFV( Amt_BAL( Amt_BAL( Amt_INT( Amt_INT( Amt_PRN( Amt_PRN( Amt_ΣINT( Amt_SigmaINT( Amt_ΣPRN( Amt_SigmaPRN( Cnvt_EFF( Cnvt_EFF( Cnvt_APR( Cnvt_APR( Cost( Cost( Sell( Sell( Margin( Margin( PmtEnd PmtEnd PmtBgn PmtBgn Bond_PRC( Bond_PRC( Bond_YLD( Bo
.9ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ،ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ. ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﲟﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. ﻏﺮﺽ ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ،Aﻭﻳﹸﻘﺴﻤﻪ ﺑـ ) B (2, 3, 5, 7....ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟـ .A • ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟـ .A • ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ .
ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ،ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﲔ ﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ،ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ( ﻟـ . X :Y1ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ :Y2ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ :Y3ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ :Y4ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ :Y5ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻝ Y3ﻭ Y4 ﺑﻌﺪ ،ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ Y1ﻭ .
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﳝﻨﺤﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ،ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺬ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ. ﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .S • SHT ﻫﺎﻡ! • ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ fx-7400GIIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ .S • SHT .1ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ S • SHTﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ S • SHTﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ ﺏ ”.“SHEET ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ )ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ( ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ. ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﳑﻄﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ .
• } ... {DELﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟـ ) DELﺣﺬﻑ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. • }{ROW}/{COL}/{ALL • } ... {INSﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟـ ) INSﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ. • }{ROW}/{COL • } ... {CLRﲤﺴﺢ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ. • } ... {GRPHﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟـ GRPHﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ) .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (STAT • }{GPH1}/{GPH2}/{GPH3}/{SEL}/{SET • } ... {CALCﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟـ ) CALCﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ) .ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (STAT • }{1VAR}/{2VAR}/{REG}/{SET • } ...
u ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ .1ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). 2(FILE)1(OPEN .2ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w uﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،S • SHTﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﻟﺘﻪ ،ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ. u ﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ .1ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(FILE)3(SV • AS .2ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ،ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .
ﻫﺎﻡ! • • • • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻛﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻠﻒ CSVﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ. ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺷﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ،ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ) CSVﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﺻﻒ ،2ﻋﻤﻮﺩ (3ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ. ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ CSVﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻴﻪ 26ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ 999ﺻﻒ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ "."Invalid Data Size uﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ CSV .
Auto Calc u Auto Calcﻫﻮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) S • SHTﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-34 ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ Auto Calcﻣﻔﻌﻞ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ،ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ .ﻫﺬﺍ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺒﻄﺊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ Auto Calcﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻞ )ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ،ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ. uﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) .
ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﻼﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻼﻳﺎﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ . fﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ fﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ،C1ﻣﺜﻼ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩC ﻛﺎﻣﻼ )ﻣﻦ C1ﺍﻟﻰ .(C999ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ C1:C999 )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ( ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ. ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ dﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ Aﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﹰ ﺃﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ fﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ 1ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﹰ .ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.
) kﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺛﻮﺍﺑﺖ ،ﻭ ﻧﺺ ،ﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺩﻋﻮﻧﺎ ﺍﻭﻻ ﻧﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻬﺎ. uﻹﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ .1ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ،ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﲟﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ. .2ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.
k ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺗﻪ.ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ،sin30، A1×2 ،7+3ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ )=(ﻗﺒﻠﻬﺎ. ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ sdawﻣﺜﻼ ﹰ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ) 0.5ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ Degﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ(. uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .
• ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ،ﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﻴﻢ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ. .3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ) 6(EXEﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ wﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ. ⇒ kﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﻲﺀ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ )”( .
.3ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ C2ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻘﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ C3ﻭ .C4ﻭ ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ C2 ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. 2(EDIT)2(COPY)c1(PASTE)c1(PASTE)J ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ ”ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(9-11 k ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﲤﻠﻚ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﻲ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ" ،ﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻩ )ﻣﻦ Aﺍﻟﻰ (Z ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺻﻔﻪ )ﻣﻦ 1ﺍﻟﻰ .(999ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲡﻌﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ .
ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺟﺰﺋﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ،ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻟﺼﻘﺖ ﺑﻬﺎ ،ﻓﺎﻧﻚ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻖ .ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺀ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻻﺭ ) ($ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺑﻘﺎﺋﻪ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ .ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻻﺭ ) ($ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻖ :ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻒ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ) ،($A1ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻒ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ) ،(A$1ﻭ ﺻﻒ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ).
k ﻗﺺ ﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ .ﻻ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻲ( ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ. ⇒ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ =A1+5ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ B1ﻭ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .B2ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ ﻫﻮ A1ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﹼﻴﺮ.
k ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻞﺀ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ .ﺍﻷﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﻜﻢ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ. ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ B1, B2، B3ﻣﺜﻼ ،ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻞﺀ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ،ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ . B1ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻞﺀ ﳌﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ.
k ﻓﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﺮﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﺯ. uﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ .1ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ. • ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(9-6 • ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ERRORﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ. .2ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﺋﻪ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﳝﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ. ﻣﺜﺎﻻ :ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ،Bﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ،B2:D4، B10:D20ﺍﻟﺦ. .2ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ).4(INS • ﺳﻴﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﹰ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﺮﺭﺕ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ.J ، .3ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(ROWﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻭ ) 2(COLﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ.
ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ (CellMean ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ. ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ5(CEL)3(Mean) : ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ[)] :ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ:ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ(CellMean ﻣﺜﺎﻝ=CellMean(A3:C5) : ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ .A3:C5 )ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ( (CellMedian )ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ( (CellSum )ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ( (CellProd )ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ( ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ.
.4ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ(، ﻭ ﺍﻹﲡﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﶈﻮﺭ xﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﶈﻮﺭ .y-ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ .
uﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ .1ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ. • ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ،ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ. .2ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )6(g)1(GRPH)6(SET • ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ) StatGraph1ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ(. ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻝ ،XCellRange، YCellRangeﺍﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ،ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ )1(CELL) 2(CELLﻟﻠﺘﺮﺩﺩ( ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ .ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ) 1(:ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﻟﻮﻥ ) (:ﺑﲔ ﺇﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ. .4ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ،ﺇﺿﻐﻂ wﺍﻭ .
• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 1ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ. ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻤﺪﺓ: ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ: 1 1VarXCellﻭ 2VarXCell 2 1VarFreqﻭ 2VarYCell 3 2VarFreq • ﻳ ﹼﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ.
ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ :ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ: }{CALC} - {2VAR "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ")ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-16 }{CALC} - {REG "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ")ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (6-17 }{CALC} - {SET “ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (9-19 .5ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ S • SHT ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ )ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ،ﺫﺍﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ، ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ( ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ.
ﻫﺎﻡ! ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺺ ،ﺍﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ERRORﳋﻠﻴﺔ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ،ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ،ﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ،ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟـ 0 ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ) ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ( ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻘﺔ. uﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ .1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ) Vct Zﺍﻟﻰ (Vct A ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ .ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ،6(g)4(RCL)4(VCTﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ. uﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ .1ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ،ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ eActivity ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ .eActivityﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ، ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ "ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ". ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ eActivityﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﹼﻢ ،ﻣﺜﻼ ،ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ،ﻭ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺏ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻄﻼﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ eActivityﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻭ ﺣﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎ،ﺍﻟﺦ.
ﻳ ﹼﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ .eActivity ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .........................ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ،ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﺺ. ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ........ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ .ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،RUN • MATﻋﻨﺪ ﲤﻜﲔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ. ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ .......................
• } ...{'MATﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ /(10-7ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (10-7 • } ...{'LISTﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (10-7 • ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ • } ...{TEXTﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. • } ...{CHARﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ. • } ...{A↔aﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﲤﻜﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ .(a • } ...{MATHﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ) MATHﺻﻔﺤﺔ .
uﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(OPENﺍﻭ *.w * ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ ،ﺍﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﺳﻮﺑﻚ. uﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ cﻭ fﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).3(DEL • ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ " ﺣﺬﻑ eActivity؟" .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺊ. uﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ).4(SRC • ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ. .
kﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ،ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ. uﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﺺ .1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ” “TEXTﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .F3 ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﲤﻜﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ 3ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ”“TEXT • ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ” “CALCﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ F3ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ. ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 3(CALCﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ.
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ eActivityﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ .ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) RUN • MATﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(1-3ﻭﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ. • ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ .
uﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ } {'MATﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ. ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .RUN • MATﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(2-38ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ e • ACTﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ RUN • MATﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ .eActivityﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ .ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ" ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ" ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).
uﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ .1ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )2(STRP • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ .ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ،ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(10-8 .3ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ. • ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ”) “Graphﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ .(GRAPH .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .
.9ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ).6(DRAW • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ. .10ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ،eActivityﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) (. !a • ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 8ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. • ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ .ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. .11ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ ،ﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ.
uﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .w • ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﺘﺎﺭ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﺇﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﻭ ﺿﻐﻂ wﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺮﻭﻃﻲ.
ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ( ﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ eActivityﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻹﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ” “g2eﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ. • ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ. • ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ))(1(FILE)2(SV-AS ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ eActivityﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ”) “g1eﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ( ،ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ” “g2eﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﳌﻠﻒ eActivityﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳌﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ) ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ( ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ OS 2.
uﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ eActivity ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )1(FILE)4(CAPA . ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J uﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .J ﺍﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
اﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﺤﺎدي ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة fx-7400GIII ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج ﻣﻦ اﻵﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﻋﺮض اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ،واﻟﺒﺤﺚ ،واﳊﺬف. ﻫﺎم! اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج fx-7400GIIIﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺬاﻛﺮة ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ .وﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬا ،ﻓﺈن ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﳌﺒﻴﱠﻨﺔ أدﻧﺎه ﺗﻜﻮن ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ. fx-9860GIII/fx-9750GIII ﻳﺘﻢ ﲡﻬﻴﺰ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻨﻤﺎذج ﺑﺬاﻛﺮة رﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ و ذاﻛﺮة ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎ ،ﻟﺬا ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ :ﻋﺮض اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ,وﺑﺤﺚ و ﺣﺬف ،و ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﲔ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮﺗﲔ.
kﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ ذاﻛﺮة واﺣﺪة ﻓﻲ وﻗﺖ واﺣﺪ :اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ أو ذاﻛﺮة اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. • ﻣﻨﺬ أن ﻛﺎن اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج fx-7400GIIIﻓﻘﻂ اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. • وﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻤﺎذج fx-9860GIIIأو ،fx-9750GIIIﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺄداء واﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ وﺿﻊ MEMORYاﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮض ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺬاﻛﺮة اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ.
ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ* 1 ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ g2m.ﺃﻭ *g1m. ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﰎ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ " ".g1mﺃﻭ ".".g2m ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ eActivity ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ eActivityﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ )ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ، ﻭﻟﻐﺎﺕ ،ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ( ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ،ﻭﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ،ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ )] [(. *ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ .
uﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ .1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ،ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 5(RN • Fﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ. .3ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻄﻠﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻠﺪ. • ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ A :ﺍﻟﻰ ، Zﻭ { 0 ,~ ,‘ ,} ,ﺍﻟﻰ ، 9ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ " ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ". • ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ" ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ. • ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻠﺪﺓ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . J .
• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻠﺪ ،ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ) ( ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ،ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ) (gﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻣﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻠﺪ. J → • ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ MEMORYﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ. kﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻡ! • ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-7400GIIIﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. uﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ .
uﲢﻘﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﲢﻘﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ،1ﻳﻘﻊ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ. ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ. ﻭ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ " ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ" ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ.
kﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ uﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .1ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. • ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .11-2 .2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ )ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ،ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).6(DEL • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 1(Yesﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ. uﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ .1ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. • ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .11-2 .2ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ )ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ .
uﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﻑ ""S .1ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. • ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .11-2 .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )3(SRC • ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ " "Sﻟﻜﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ • ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ " "Sﻣﻈﻠﻼ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. kﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﺎﻡ! • ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GIII uﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ .
ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "! "Completeﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ .1 • ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(Yesﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻭ ) 6(Noﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ. ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " "Memory Fullﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻹﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ. uﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ. .
kﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﺰﺃﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ. ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ .ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ,ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﲡﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻳﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ. uﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ .1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ MEMORYﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 5(OPTﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ. ﻭ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "! "Completeﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺴﲔ .
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ. .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. (} ... 1ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ{ •) (} ... 2ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ{ •) • )} ... 3(LANGﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ{ • )} ... 4(VERﻧﺴﺨﺔ{ • )} ... 5(RSETﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ{ • )} ... 6(g)5(OSﲢﺪﻳﺚ{* * fx-9860GIII/fx-9750GIIIﻓﻘﻂ .
kﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ LANGﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ. uﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ .1 .2 .3 .4 ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 3(LANGﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ. ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ cﻭ fﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ،ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). 1(SEL ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺎﺭﺓ .ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . J ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﺍﻭ ) !J(QUITﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ. uﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )(fx-9860GIII, fx-9750GIII .
uﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(NAMEﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ. .2ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ. .3ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ wﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ،ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ . J kﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ .1ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) 5(RSETﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ .
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ.
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﺒﲔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺃﻭ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺘﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ .ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﹼ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ. ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ .LINKﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ. • }} ... {TRANﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{ • }} ... {RECVﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ { • }} ... *{EXAMﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ{ • }} ... *{CABLﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ{ • }} ...
.2اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ). 1(On ﻳﻘﻮم ﻫﺬا ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ و ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت. .3أوﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻼم. .4ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻼم ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎل. .5اﻻﺑﺘﺪاء ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻴﻠﺔ اﻹرﺳﺎل ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻرﺳﺎل ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻼم ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ و ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت. kإﺧﺘﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮﺑﻂ ) fx-9860GIII/fx-9750GIIIﻓﻘﻂ( رﺑﻂ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBاﻟﻰ اﻵﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮف ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﳊﻮار "اﺧﺘﺮ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮﺑﻂ" .
kرﺑﻂ و ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ اﻟﻀﺨﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ *USBاﳌﺘﺎح اﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻳﹰﺎ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﻂ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ. * ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ. ﻫﺎم! ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBو اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ إﺟﺮاء ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ رﺑﻂ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت .اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء اﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ أﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﳝﻜﻦ أن ﺗﺆدﹼي اﻟﻰ إﻧﻬﺎء رﺑﻂ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت. uﻹﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ اﻵﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ و اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .1اﺑﺪأ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ. .2ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ ،اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﻟﺮﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﻊ اﻵﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
uﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ اﻵﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ و ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﶈﺮﹼك .1إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻵﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،Windowsﻻﺣﻆ أن ﺣﺮوف اﶈﺮﹼك ) ،E, F, Gاﻟﺦ( ﹼ اﻵﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. .2ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎد ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮع ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺠﺮي ﻓﻲ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ واﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻷﻋﻤﺎل اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﻫﺎم! ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎد ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎم ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء إﺣﺪى ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أدﻧﺎه ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ USBﻋﻦ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. • :Windowsأﻧﻘﺮ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ "إزاﻟﺔ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ﺑﺸﻜﻞ آﻣﻦ" اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ﺻﻒ اﳌﻬﺎم ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﻛﻦ اﻷﳝﻦ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ .
@MainMem ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ GMEMxx.g2m LISTxx.g1m ﺃﻭLISTxx.g2m LISTANS.g1m ﺃﻭLISTANS.g2m FILEx.g1m ﺃﻭFILEx.g2m MATANS.g1m ﺃﻭMATANS.g2m MATx.g1m ﺃﻭMATx.g2m VCTANS.g2m VCTx.g2m <>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.g1m <>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.txt <>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.g1m ﺃﻭ <>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ.g2m VMEMx.g1m ﺃﻭVMEMx.g2m PICTxx.g1m CAPTxx.g1m STRINGxx.g2m ALPHAMEM.g1m ﺃﻭ ALPHAMEM.g2m RECUR.g1m ﺃﻭRECUR.g2m SETUP.g2m CONICS.g1m DIST.g1m DYNA MEM.g1m ﺃﻭ DYNA MEM.g2m EQUATION.g1m ﺃﻭ EQUATION.g2m FINANCE.g2m STAT.g1m ﺃﻭSTAT.
uﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ USB ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ @MainMemﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻠﹼﺪﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ .ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟـ ،USBﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﹼﺪ .@MainMemﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻠﹼﺪ @MainMemﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ.
uﻟﻨﻘﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﲔ اﻵﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ و اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .1أرﺑﻂ اﻵﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ و اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،واﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺤﺮﹼك أﻗﺮاص اﻵﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. • أﻧﻈﺮ "ﻹﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ اﻵﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ و اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(13-3 .2اﻧﺴﺦ أو ﻋ ﹼﺪل،أو اﺣﺬف ،أو أﺿﻒ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ. • اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﳌﻠﻒ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ اﳋﺎص ﺑﻚ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﹰ.
.5ﺑﻌﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ،اﺣﻔﻆ و أﻏﻠﻖ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻨﺺ. • اﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼت ﲢﺖ أﺳﻤﺎء اﳌﻠﻒ اﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب .اذا أردت اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﳊﻔﻆ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼت ،ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ اﳌﻠﻒ اﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ \.@MainMem\PROGRAM • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ اﳌﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ txtاﻟﺮﻣﺰ ASCIIأو .ANSI .6ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ اﻵﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ و اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ • أﻧﻈﺮ "ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺑﲔ اﻵﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ و ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(13-4 kﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﳌﻠﻔﺎت اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻵﻟﺔ اﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﻋﻄﺎﺋﻬﺎ اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ .
.2ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﲔ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ *.SB-62 * ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ. uﺭﺑﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﲔ .1ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻜﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﲔ. .2ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﲔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ .SB-62 • ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ 3ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ .fx-7400GIII .3ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﲔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻛـ .3PIN ) (1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .LINK ) (2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ,4(CABLﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ.
ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(TRANﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. • }} ... {SELﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ{ • }} ... {CRNTﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ{*1 *1ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ. uﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺎﺭﺓ )ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) 1(SELﺍﻭ ) 2(CRNTﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. • }} ...
ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ. kﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ.
ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ SETUP STAT >*1 ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ*1 TABLE >
kﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ fx-9860GIIIﺃﻭ fx-9750GIIIﺃﻭ fx-7400GIIIﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
uﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ fx-9860GIIIﺃﻭ fx-9750GIIIﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺔ fx-7400GIII ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ fx-9860GIII :ﻭfx-9750GIII ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡfx-7400GIII : • ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ )'( ﺃﻭ ) ،pi (πﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ.
uﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ • ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻭ .(YP-100 ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ،ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺤﺐ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ PRGM ﹰ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ. • ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ،ﺃﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ USBﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺭﺑﻄﻪ .
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ PYTHON )ﻟـ ،fx-9860GIIIﻭfx-9750GIII ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ PYTHONﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ .Pythonﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ PYTHONﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،Pythonﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ،ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ،ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ. ﻣﻬﻢ! • ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ PYTHONﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﹰﺍ ﻣﻦ ،MicroPython Version 1.9.4ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﻴﻴﻔﻪ ﻟﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ .ﻭﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﻡ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ MicroPythonﻋﻦ Pythonﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ PYTHONﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ،ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ .
kﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﺪ ﹰﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ pyﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺪ ﹰﺀﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ pyﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﻢ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻒ pyﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﹼ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻫﻮ .10 ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻫﻮ .OCTA ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ) (Sﻭﺣﺠﻢ )(V ﹼ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ) (Aﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﹰﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.
.3ﺃﺟ ﹺﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺺ .py • ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ) PYTHONﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ (14-9ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻄﱠ ﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ. ﺃﺟ ﹺﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ: ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ: )!e(CATALOG)6(CTGY)d(math)((I)(import math ww import math )=(a5(A↔a)v(A)!.
kﺷﺎﺷﺔ SHELL ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ (RUN)2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ SHELLﻓﻲ ،PYTHON ﺴﻤﻰ "ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ .pyﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺗ ﹸ ﱠ ."SHELLﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ SHELLﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ pyﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ،ﺑﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺳﻄ ﹴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣ ﹴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ .ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ،SHELLﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﹰ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ) "SHELLﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .
kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ pyﺟﺪﻳﺪ • } … {A↔aﻳﺒ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ kﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ • }{FILE ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ • } … {SAVEﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ pyﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﹰ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ • } … {SV • ASﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ py ﹴ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ • } ...
.3ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻭﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ .PYTHON • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﻟﻔﺎ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ،ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(.
ﻣﻬﻢ! .ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ()log ،ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻗﻮﺍﺱ) e ،ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ،ﻭ piﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ .mathﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﹰ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ *.mathﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ،ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ" )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ (14-10ﻭ"ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ: ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ) "mathﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(14-12 * ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ importﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ fromﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ،ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ " "math.ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ .
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ( ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ } {COMﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﻴﺔ.
uﻣﺜﺎﻝ :ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ if...else .1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .(ifelse)2(COM)1(g)6 • ﻳﹸﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ،if...elseﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﻁ .if ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ. • ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺩﺋﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﹰ kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ )ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ( ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻫﻮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ .
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ. .5ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ (INPUT)1ﺃﻭ .w • ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ PYTHONﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ،ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﺮﺿﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﹰ ﺃﻭﻻ. ﻓﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻭﺿﻊ PYTHONﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ All ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻭﺿﻊ .PYTHON Built-in ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ .
kﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ )(import ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ،PYTHONﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ Pythonﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ. • ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ Pythonﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ mathﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ random • ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ casioplotﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ) CASIOﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ (14-17 ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﹰ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ) (importﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ. ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ import >ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ< import ﻳﺴﺘﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ )ﻣﻠﻒ (pyﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ >ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ<.
uﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ :ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ math .1ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .(SHELL)4 .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ! (CATALOG)eﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ (CTGY)6ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .(math)d .4ﻧﻔﱢﺬ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ) w(M)hﻳﺪﺧﻞ "("math. !) w(C)I(CATALOG)eﻳﺪﺧﻞ ")(("ceil .5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .wc.b • ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ،mathﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ "ceil()" mathﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ. .
.4ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ SHELL ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ SHELLﺳﻄﺮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ،ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ SHELLﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ .ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ pyﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .SHELL ﺳﻄﺮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺃﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ )>>> ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ( ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ )"|" ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ( ﺷﺎﺷﺔ SHELL • ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ 127ﺣﺮﻓﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ،ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺪ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ >>> ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ.
uﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ SHELL ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ SHELLﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ" )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .(14-15 uﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ SHELLﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ )ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ( ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ fﺃﻭ .cﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﹰ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯﻩ. ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ uﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ) SHELLﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ( ﹰ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮﻩ. .2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ dﺃﻭ .
kﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ SHELLﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ SHELLﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ .ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ SHELLﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ. uﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ :1ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ (2+3) × 102 = 500 (c+d)*baxw 2+3 × (4+5) = 29 c+d*(e+f)w ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ -ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ -ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ. • ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ PYTHONﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ .
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ inputﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ PYTHON inputﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ Pythonﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺗﻘﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ .py ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ input ])inputﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻧﺺ ﻃﻠﺐ[( ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ ،pyﺗﻜﺘﺐ ] inputﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻧﺺ ﻃﻠﺐ[ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ،SHELLﻭﺗﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ )”( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ )’( ﻟـ ]ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻧﺺ ﻃﻠﺐ[.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ SHELLﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻧﺺ pyﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ SHELLﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ .pyﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ،ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ SHELL ﻣﻌ ﹼ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "¼ SHELL "¼ Initialized ﺃﻣﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻧﺺ py ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻧﺺ py ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ .5ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ )ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ (casioplot ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ casioplotﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻧﻤﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ CASIOﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻭﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ * from casioplot import )(show_screen ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: • ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﺳﺒﻖ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﹰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ show_screenﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ .SHELLﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ. • ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ،SHELLﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ Jﺃﻭ Aﺃﻭ !.
)(set_pixel ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ :ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐset_pixel(x, y[, color]) : • ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ،xﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ y ﻳﹸﺤﺪﱢﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ xﻭ yﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ. ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ intﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ،0 < x < 127 : .0 < y < 63ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ.
)(get_pixel ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ :ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐget_pixel(x, y) : • ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ،xﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ y ﻳﹸﺤﺪﱢﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺛﻴﺎﺕ xﻭ yﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ. ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻼ ﹰ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ xﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ y ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) set_pixelﺻﻔﺤﺔ .
• ﻣﺜﺎﻝ: ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ size ﻳﹸﺤﺪﱢﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ "large" :ﺃﻭ " ."mediumﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ " "mediumﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ. ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻤﻴﻦ " "largeﻭ" "mediumﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﻳﻦ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ .ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ " "smallﹸ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ.
kﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ. uﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ،ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ .show_screen ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ show_screenﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ،ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻧﺺ pyﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﻭﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ show_screenﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ.
.6ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ py kﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ py ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ pyﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ،ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ. uﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ pyﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .1ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ،ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ .PYTHON .2ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ،ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ fﻭ cﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ pyﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ .(OPEN) 2 • ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ pyﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ. • ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ wﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ .
uﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺺ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻧﺺ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ .1ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻪ ،ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ !.(CLIP)i .2ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻪ. • ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ. • ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ،ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ. .3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ (COPY)1ﺃﻭ .(CUT)2 uﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ .
ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ } {JUMPﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ" )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .(14-23 uﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ py ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ pyﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ،ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ pyﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ. .7ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ( ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ pyﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ،ﻭﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ.
.8ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ pyﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ pyﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺁﺧﺮ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ pyﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ. • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ pyﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ PYTHONﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ )ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ .
uﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ pyﻳﺴﺘﻮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﻦ ) (Aﻭ) (Bﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ PYTHONﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ .ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ pyﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ .PYTHON ) (Aﻣﻠﻒ pyﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ASCIIﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ UTF-8ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ASCII • ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ،ASCIIﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ .PYTHONﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ.
.9ﻧﺼﻮﺹ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ :1ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ ﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ. ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻫﻮ ﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ " "if... else...ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ. ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ))"=a=int(input("a ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ .py ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ .a if a<5: ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ aﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ،5 )"print("a<5 else: ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ .
ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ :2ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ importﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ .ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﺔ. >ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ<>.ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ< ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ import math ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ mathﻭﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻠﻬﺎ. P=math.pi ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ،piﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ .math )print(P ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ .
ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ def f(x,y,z): if x>0: t=x+y+z else: t=x-y-z )return(t ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ،fﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻄﺎﺕ ،xﻭ ،yﻭ.z ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ xﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ،0 ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ tﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ .x+y+z ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ xﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ،(0 ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ tﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ .x-y-z ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ tﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ. ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﺺ pyﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﻨﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﹺﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ .ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻧﺺ pyﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ.
ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻬﻢ! • ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ pyﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ pyﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ،ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ(. • ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ pyﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ SHELLﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ SHELLﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ *،ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔﻟﻼﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ pyﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ.
ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻟـ ،fx-9860GIIIﻭ fx-9750GIIIﻓﻘﻂ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ،DISTﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔHypergeometric ،Geometric ،Poisson ،Binomial : ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔF ،χ2 ،Student-t ،Normal : ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ؛ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ،ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩ ﹺﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ .ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. ﹰ .
.2ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ. • ﻧﺮﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ .ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ " ،"Binomialﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w • ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ. .3ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "."Tail • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ " ،"Tailﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ 1ﺇﻟﻰ .4 ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ. ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﹴ ( ...ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،xﻭﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ .x )1 ( ...
ﺃﻋﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻴﺔ. ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،xﺛﻢ ﹺ .6ﹼ • ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﺇﻟﻰ 4ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ. ) (1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .e ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ،ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ 4ﻓﻴﻪ. ) (2ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ،ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ. • ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ) (1ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .(EDIT)1Kﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ.
uﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ Normal :σﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ )(0 < σ :μﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ Student-t : dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﺔ ) (0 < df uﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ )(Upper ،Lower ،x ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "} "Tail ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ( { ) (≥Xﺃﻭ } ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ χ2 : dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ( ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ F : n:dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻂ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ( : d:dfﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ( { ) (≤Xﺃﻭ } { )}) (=X { ) (=Xﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ
.2ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ DIST kﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ • • • • • • { ) ... (≥Xﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ " ."Tailﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،x } ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ .x { )≥ ... (≥Xﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ " ."Tailﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ } ) (Lowerﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) (Upperﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ،ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ. { ) ... (≤Xﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ " .
.3ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ kﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ .ﻭﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ .x ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) ،(xﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ) ،(Lowerﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) (Upperﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ .ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ) .(pﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ،ﹼ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
uﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ xﻣﻦ 36 ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ .ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﹼ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻴﺔ. ﺇﻟﻰ ،37.5ﺛﻢ ﹺ ﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ " ،"Normalﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .w .1ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ،ﹼ • ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ،ﺃﺟ ﹺﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. )1 .2 (c wfdwcwgd (EXE)1 ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﹸ wf.hd .
.4ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ؛ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ. ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ،ﺭﺍ ﹺﺟﻊ "ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ" )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .(15-1ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﺟﻊ "ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻜﻮﺱ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ،ﺭﺍ ﹺ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ .
kﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ χ2 } { )≥(≥X Tail Lower 1 Upper 3 df 1 kﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊF Tail } { )≥(≥X Lower 1 Upper 3 n:df 1 d:df 2 ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻲ ،ﺭﺍ ﹺﺟﻊ "ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(" )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ،(6-57ﻭ"ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ) ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(" )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ (6-56ﻟﻮﺿﻊ .STATﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﹺﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ DISTﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ .
"ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(" ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ [S([)G /RZHU ∫ 8SSHU =S [S([)G /RZHU }Tail: {X ∫ 8SSHU =S [S([)G ² ∫ =S }Tail: {X }Tail: {X "ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(" ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻜﻮﺱ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ (Normal [S([)G /RZHU ∫ }Tail: {X 8SSHU =S [S([)G ² ∫ =S }Tail: {X ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ DISTﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ؛ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ،∞ = 9.
ﻣﻠﺤﻖ .1ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ Syntax ERROR Ma ERROR ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ • ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ • ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ • ﺍﺿﻐﻂ Jﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ • • ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ. • • • • • Go ERROR ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ 1 2 ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ. ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ.
ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ Memory ERROR • ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺔ. Argument ERROR • ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﳊﺠﺔ. Dimension • ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ • ،ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ،ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﺍﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ،ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ. • • • ERROR Range ERROR 1 2 3 4 Condition ERROR • ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ 1 .
ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ Can’t Simplify !Can’t Solve Adjust initial ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ • ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ • ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 'Simpﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ. ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) 'Simpﺻﻔﺤﺔ ,(2-23ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺳﻢ ﻟـ 3ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ .4/8 • ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ. • ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ • ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ. ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ. value or bounds. Then try again.
ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ • ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ. Invalid Data Size • ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﳊﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻣﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 256ﺧﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-9750GIII ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ. • ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ. ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ :ﻣﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ 7ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ fx-9750GIIIﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﱘ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ .
ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ File System ERROR*1 ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ • ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. • ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻫﺎﻡ!" ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ،ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﹼ "ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ .(12-3 ﻫﺎﻡ! ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ .
.2ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ sinx cosx tanx ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ (DEG) |x| < 9 × (109)° (RAD) |x| < 5 × 107πrad sin–1x cos–1x tan–1x |x| < 1 × 10100 sinhx coshx |x| < 230.9516564 tanhx |x| < 1 ×10100 sinh–1x |x| < 1 × 10100 cosh–1x 1 < x < 1 × 10100 " " logx Inx 10x –1 × 10100 < x < 100 –1 × 10100 < x < 230.
ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ”’ ° |a|, b, c < 1 × 10100 0 < b, c ⎯← |x| < 1 × 10100 ”’ ° ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻲ: |x| < 1 × 107 ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ±1 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ*. 15ﺭﻗﻢ x > 0: –1 × 10 < ylogx < 100 x=0:y>0 m –––– x < 0 : y = n, 2n+1 )ﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ (m, n 100 )^(xy " " ﻟﻜﻦ ؛ • –1 × 10100 < y log |x| < 100 ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﺤﺠﺞ.
ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) fx-9860GIII/fx-9750GIIIﻓﻘﻂ( ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ) (Examination Modesﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ؛ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳋﻀﻮﻉ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ. ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. fx-9860GIII ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ،ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ .IB fx-9750GIII ﻭﺿﻌﺎﻥ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ :ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ IBﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ).Texas (US ﻓﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ.
.3ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ).1(Yes • ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ. .4ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .2 • ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ. .5ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ .J ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ fx-9750GIII ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ :ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ IBﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Mathﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ Input/Outputﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ Input/Outputﺑـ .Mth/Mixﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ Mathﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ Input/Outputﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ .IB .1ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )!o(OFFﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. .
uﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ • ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ IB ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ )Texas (US ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ 15ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ. ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ • ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) ﺃﻭ ( ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ. • ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ،ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ 60ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ. • ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ a-ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ .
uﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ. ) (1ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ .1ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ USBﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ. .2ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ") "Select Connection Modeﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ،ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ 1ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. .3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. .4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ،ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ. .5ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ.
uﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ .LINK ) ... 3(EXAM)2(ENTRﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ. ) ... 3(EXAM)3(APPﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ. ) ... 3(EXAM)4(EXITﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ.
MicroPython license information The MIT License (MIT) Copyright (c) 2013-2017 Damien P.
E-CON3 Application (English) ( fx-9860GIII, fx-9750GIII)
Important! • Do not install Add-in E-CON2 on a calculator that has E-CON3 installed. Doing so may cause operational problems. • All explanations in this section assume that you are fully familiar with all calculator and Data Logger (CMA CLAB* or CASIO EA-200) precautions, terminology, and operational procedures. • The E-CON3 application is designed to get the most out of the measurement functions of the CASIO EA-200 Data Logger.
1-1 E-CON3 Overview 1 E-CON3 Overview • From the Main Menu, select E-CON3 to enter the E-CON3 Mode. E-CON3 Main Menu • The “E-CON3 Mode” provides the functions listed below for simple and more efficient data sampling using a Data Logger. • 1(SET) ......... Displays a screen for setting up a Data Logger. • 2(MEM)........ Displays a screen for saving Data Logger setup data under a file name. • 3(PROG) ..... Performs program conversion.
2-1 Using the Setup Wizard 2 Using the Setup Wizard This section explains how to use the Setup Wizard to configure the Data Logger setup quickly and easily simply by replying to questions as they appear. If you need more control over specific sampling parameters, you should consider using the Advanced Setup procedure on page 3-1. k Setup Wizard Parameters Setup Wizard lets you make changes to the following three Data Logger basic sampling parameters using an interactive wizard format.
2-2 Using the Setup Wizard u To configure a Data Logger setup using Setup Wizard Before getting started... • Before starting the procedure below, make sure you first decide if you want to start sampling immediately using the setup you configure with Setup Wizard, or if you want to store the setup for later sampling. • See sections 6-1, 7-1, and 8-1 of this chapter (E-CON3 Application) for information about procedures required to start sampling and to store a setup.
2-3 Using the Setup Wizard If you select this sensor/option: Go here for more information: [CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave & FFT] “Using Setup Wizard to Configure Settings for FFT (Frequency Characteristics) Data Sampling” on page 2-4 [CASIO] - [Microphone] - [FFT only] [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate] or [CMA] - [Photogate] - [Gate] “To configure a setup for Photogate alone” on page 2-5 [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Pulley] or [CMA] - [Photogate] - [Pulley] “To configure a setup for Photogate and
2-4 Using the Setup Wizard k Using Setup Wizard to Configure Settings for FFT (Frequency Characteristics) Data Sampling (EA-200 only) When you perform sound sampling executed the EA-200’s built-in microphone (by specifying [CASIO] - [Microphone] as the sensor), Setup Wizard will provide you with three options: [Sound wave], [Sound wave & FFT], and [FFT only]. “Sound wave” records the following two dimensions for the sampled sound data: elapsed time (horizontal axis) and volume (vertical axis).
2-5 Using the Setup Wizard k Using Setup Wizard to Configure a Photogate Setup Connection of a Vernier or CMA Photogate requires configuration of setup parameters that are slightly different from parameters for other types of sensors. u To configure a setup for Photogate alone 1. On the E-CON3 main menu, press 1(SET)1(WIZ) to start the setup wizard. • This displays the “Select Sensor” dialog box. 2. If you are using a Vernier Photogate alone, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate].
2-6 Using the Setup Wizard u To configure a setup for Photogate and Smart Pulley 1. On the E-CON3 main menu, press 1(SET)1(WIZ) to start the setup wizard. 2. This displays the “Select Sensor” dialog box. 3. If you are using a Vernier Photogate with Pulley, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] [Pulley]. When the “Select Channel” dialog box appears, advance to step 4 of this procedure. If you are using a CMA Photogate with Pulley, select [CMA] - [Photogate] - [Pulley].
2-7 Using the Setup Wizard 6. In line “Y1”, input the function of the waveform for the sound you want to input. • Note that the angle unit is always radians. • Input a function where the value of “Y” is within the range of –1.5 to +1.5. 7. Press 6(DRAW) to graph the function. • This graphs the function and displays a vertical cursor line as shown below. Use the graph to specify the range that you want to output to the speaker. 8.
2-8 Using the Setup Wizard 13. Press w. • This displays a screen like the one shown below. 14. Perform one of the following operations, depending on what you want to do. To change the output frequency and try again: Press 1(Yes) to return to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. Next, repeat the above steps from step 10. To change the output range of the waveform graph and try again: Press 6(No) to return to the graph screen in step 7. Next, repeat the above steps from step 8.
3-1 Using Advanced Setup 3 Using Advanced Setup Advanced Setup provides you with total control over a number of parameters that you can adjust to configure the Data Logger setup that suits your particular needs. The procedures in this section provide the general steps you should perform when using Advanced Setup to configure a Data Logger setup, and to returns setup settings to their initial default values.
3-2 Using Advanced Setup • d(Trigger)........Displays a screen for configuring sampling start (trigger) conditions. See “Trigger Setup” on page 3-8 for more information. • e(Graph) .........Displays a screen for configuring graph settings. See “Graph Setup” on page 3-13 for more information. • You can return the settings on the above setup screens (b through e) using the procedure described under “To return setup parameters to their initial defaults”. 6.
3-3 Using Advanced Setup k Channel Setup The Channel Setup screen shows the sensors that are currently assigned to each channel (CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC, Mic). u To configure Channel Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press b(Channel). • This displays the Channel Setup screen. Currently selected channel Channel Setup Screen 2. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the channel whose setting you want to change. 3.
3-4 Using Advanced Setup • From the menu that appears after you select “Photogate” as the sensor, select [Gate] or [Pulley]. [Gate] ................Select this option when using the Photogate sensor alone. [Pulley] ..............Select this option when using the Photogate sensor along with a smart pulley. 5(None) ......... Select this option to disable the SONIC channel. • Mic Channel (EA-200 only) For this channel, the sensor is automatically set to Built-in (External) Microphone.
3-5 Using Advanced Setup k Sample Setup The Sample Setup screen lets you configure a number of settings that control sampling. u To configure Sample Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press c(Sample). • This displays the Sample Setup screen, with the “Mode” line highlighted, which indicates that you can select the sampling mode. 2. Select the sampling mode that suits the type of sampling you want to perform.
3-6 Using Advanced Setup 3. To change the sampling interval setting, move the highlighting to “Interval”. Next, press 1 to display a dialog box for specifying the sampling interval. • The range of values you can select depends on the current sampling mode setting. If this sampling mode is selected: This is the allowable setting range: Realtime 0.
3-7 Using Advanced Setup 6. After all the settings are the way you want, press w. • This returns to the Advanced Setup menu. Note • Whenever the current Channel Setup (page 3-3) and Trigger Setup (page 3-8) settings become incompatible due to a change in Sample Setup settings, these settings revert automatically to their initial defaults.
3-8 Using Advanced Setup k Trigger Setup You can use the Trigger Setup screen to specify the event that causes sampling to start (w key operation, etc.) The event that causes sampling to start is called the “trigger source”, which is indicated as “Source” on the Trigger Setup screen. The following table describes each of the six available trigger sources.
3-9 Using Advanced Setup u To configure Trigger Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press d(Trigger). • This displays the Trigger Setup screen with the “Source” line highlighted. • The function menu items that appears in the menu bar depend on the sampling mode selected with Sample Setup (page 3-5). The above screen shows the function menu when “Normal” is selected as the sample sampling mode. 2. Use the function keys to select the trigger source you want.
3-10 Using Advanced Setup 3. Perform one of the following operations, in accordance with the trigger source that was selected in step 2. If this is the trigger source: Do this next: [EXE] key Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu. Count Down Specify the countdown start time. See “To specify the countdown start time” below. CH1 Specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge direction.
3-11 Using Advanced Setup u To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge type Perform the following steps when “Fast”, “Normal”, or “Clock” is specified as the sampling mode (page 3-5). 1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”. 2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is value that data needs to attain before sampling starts. Sensor assigned to CH1 or SONIC by Channel Setup (page 3-3) Measurement unit supported by assigned sensor 3.
3-12 Using Advanced Setup u To configure Photogate trigger start and end settings Perform the following steps when CH1 is selected as a Photogate trigger source. 1. Move the highlighting to “Start to”. 2. Press one of the function keys described below. To specify this Photogate status: Press this key: Photogate closed 1(Close) Photogate open 2(Open) 3. Move the highlighting to “End Gate”. 4. Press one of the function keys described below.
3-13 Using Advanced Setup k Graph Setup Use the Graph Setup screen to configure settings for the graph produced after sampling is complete. You use the Sample Setup settings (page 3-5) to turn graphing on or off. u To configure Graph Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press e(Graph). • This displays the Graph Setup screen. Currently selected item Graph Setup Screen 2.
3-14 Using Advanced Setup 5. To change the real-time scroll setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to “RealScroll”. Next, press one of the function keys described below. To specify this real-time scrolling setting: Press this key: Real-time scrolling on 1(On) Real-time scrolling off 2(Off) 6. Press w to finalize Graph Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu.
4-1 Using a Custom Probe 4 Using a Custom Probe You can use the procedures in this section to configure a custom probe for use with a Data Logger. Important! • The sensors (CASIO, Vernier, CMA) that appear on the list during Channel Setup (page 3-3) are E-CON3 mode standard sensors. If you want to use a sensor that is not included in the list, configure custom probe settings. • A sensor with an output voltage in the range of 0 to 5 volts can be configured with E-CON3 as a custom probe.
4-2 Using a Custom Probe 5. Input up to 18 characters for the custom probe name, and then press E. • This will cause the highlighting to move to “Slope”. 6. Use the function keys described below to configure the custom probe setup. • To change the setting of an item, first use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the item. Next, use the function keys to select the setting you want. (1) Slope Press 1(EDIT) to input the slope for the linear interpolation formula.
4-3 Using a Custom Probe k Auto Calibrating a Custom Probe Auto calibration automatically corrects the slope and intercept values of a custom probe setup based on two actual samples. Important! • Before performing the procedure below, you should prepare two conditions whose measurement values are known. • When inputting reference value in step 5 of the procedure below, input the exact known measurement value of the condition you will sample in step 4.
4-4 Using a Custom Probe 4. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds. • This will register the first sampled value and display it on the screen. At this time the cursor will appear at the bottom of the display, ready for input of a reference value. 5. Use the key pad to input the reference value for the first sampled value, and then press w. • This cause sampling of the second value to be performed automatically, and display the same type of screen that appeared in step 3.
4-5 Using a Custom Probe k Zero Adjusting a Custom Probe This procedure zero adjusts a custom probe and sets its intercept value based on an actual sample using the applicable custom probe. u To zero adjust a custom probe 1. Connect the calculator and Data Logger, and connect the custom probe you want to zero adjust to CH1 of the Data Logger. 2. What you should do first depends on whether you are configuring a new custom probe for zero adjusting, or editing the configuration of an existing custom probe.
4-6 Using a Custom Probe k Managing Custom Probe Setups Use the procedures in this section to edit and delete existing custom probe setups. u To edit a custom probe setup 1. Display the Custom Probe List. 2. Select the custom probe setup whose configuration you want to edit. • Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the custom probe you want. 3. Press 2(EDIT). • This displays the screen for configuring a custom probe setup.
5-1 Using the MULTIMETER Mode 5 Using the MULTIMETER Mode You can use the Channel Setup screen (page 3-3) to configure a channel so that Data Logger MULTIMETER Mode sampling is triggered by a calculator operation. u To use the MULTIMETER Mode 1. Connect the calculator and Data Logger, and connect the sensors you want to the applicable Data Logger channels. 2. From the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1), use the Channel Setup screen (page 3-3) to configure sensor setups for each channel you will be using. 3.
6-1 Using Setup Memory 6 Using Setup Memory Creating Data Logger setup data using the Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup causes the data to be stored in the “current setup memory area”. The current contents of the current setup memory area are overwritten whenever you create other setup data. You can use setup memory to save the current setup memory area contents to calculator memory to keep it from being overwritten, if you want.
6-2 Using Setup Memory 2. If you are starting from the final Setup Wizard screen, press c(Save Setup-MEM). If you are starting from another screen, press 2(SAVE). • This displays the screen for inputting the setup name. 3. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name. 4. Press w and then input a memory number (1 to 99). • If you start from the final Setup Wizard screen, this saves the setup and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the final Setup Wizard screen.
6-3 Using Setup Memory u To recall a setup and use it for sampling Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with a Data Logger. 1. Connect the calculator to a Data Logger. 2. Turn on Data Logger power. 3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the appropriate Data Logger channel. 4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled. 5. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list. 6.
6-4 Using Setup Memory u To delete setup data 1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list. 2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want. 3. Press 4(DEL). 4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the setup. • To clear the confirmation message without deleting anything, press 6(No). u To recall setup data Recalling setup data stores it in the current setup memory area.
7-1 Using Program Converter 7 Using Program Converter Program Converter converts a Data Logger setup you configured using Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup to a program that can run on the calculator. You can also use Program Converter to convert a setup to a CFX-9850 Series/fx-7400 Series-compatible program.*1 *2 *1 See the documentation that came with your scientific calculator or EA-200 for information about how to use a converted program.
7-2 Using Program Converter 2. Enter up to eight characters for the program name. Note Using the program converter initial default settings will create a program like the one below. • Associated Scientific Calculator: fx-9860 Series • Associated Data Logger: EA-200 • Calibration: None • Password: None If you want to use these settings the way they are without changing them, skip steps 3 through 7 and go directly to step 8.
7-3 Using Program Converter 5. If you plan to use a custom probe connected to CH1 of the Data Logger, specify whether calibration or zero adjust should be performed. Perform one of the following key operations to configure the desired setting.
7-4 Using Program Converter k Converting a CFX-9850 Series Program to a fx-9860 Series Compatible Program To use an EA-200 control program created on the CFX-9850 Series calculator (for use on the CFX-9850) on the E-CON3, you need to convert the program to an fx-9860 program. Conversion can be performed using the program converter. EA-200 Control Program for CFX-9850 Series Convert EA-200 Control Program for fx-9860 Series u To convert a program 1.
8-1 Starting a Sampling Operation 8 Starting a Sampling Operation The section describes how to use a setup configured using the E-CON3 Mode to start a Data Logger sampling operation. k Before getting started... Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with a Data Logger. 1. Connect the calculator to a Data Logger. 2. Turn on Data Logger power. 3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the appropriate Data Logger channel. 4.
8-2 Starting a Sampling Operation u To start sampling 1. Start the sampling operation by performing one of the function key operations described below. If the final Setup Wizard screen is on the display, press b(Start Setup). If the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press 1(STRT). If the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display, press 4(STRT).
Clock Period Extended Sound Normal Fast Real-time Mode 1. Data Logger Setup Starts Sampling 2. Start Standby Pressing 1 advances to “4. Graphing”. Pressing w there returns to “3. Sampling”. • The screen shown below appears when CH1, SONIC, or Mic is used as the trigger. 3. Sampling 1 Outputting through speaker w Sample values is stored as List data only. The following three graph types can be produced when Photogate-Pulley is being used. 1. Time and distance graph 2.
9-1 Using Sample Data Memory 9 Using Sample Data Memory Performing a Data Logger sampling operation from the E-CON3 Mode causes sampled results to be stored in the “current data area” of E-CON3 memory. Separate data is saved for each channel, and the data for a particular channel in the current data area is called that channel’s “current data”. Any time you perform a sampling operation, the current data of the channel(s) you use is replaced by the newly sampled data.
9-2 Using Sample Data Memory 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the current data file you want to save, and then press 2(SAVE). • This displays the screen for inputting a data name. 4. Enter up to 18 characters for the data file name, and then press w. • This displays a dialog box for inputting a memory number. 5. Enter a memory number in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w. • This saves the sample data at the location specified by the memory number you input.
9-3 Using Sample Data Memory u To rename an existing sample data file Note • You cannot use this procedure to rename a current data file name. 1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH). • This displays the Graph Mode screen. 2. Press 2(DATA). • This displays the Sampling Data List screen. 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the data file you want to rename, and then press 3(REN). • This displays the screen for inputting a file name. 4.
10-1 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data 10 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data Graph Analysis tools make it possible to analyze graphs drawn from sampled data. k Accessing Graph Analysis Tools You can access Graph Analysis tools using either of the two methods described below.
10-2 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data k Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph This section contains a detailed procedure that covers all steps from selecting an analysis mode to drawing a graph. Note • Step 4 through step 6 are not essential and may be skipped, if you want. Skipping any step automatically applies the initial default values for its settings. • If you skip step 2, the default analysis mode is the one whose name is displayed in the top line of the Graph Mode screen.
10-3 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data 4. Specify the sampled data for graphing. a. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the name of the sampled data file you want to select, and then press 1(ASGN) or w. • This returns to the Graph Mode screen, which shows the name of the sample data file you selected. Sample data file name Graph on/off indicator Name of sensor used for sampling Graph Mode Screen b.
10-4 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data b. Use the function keys to specify the graph style you want. To specify this graph style: Press this key: Line graph with dot ( • ) data markers 1( ) 2( ) Line graph with X (×) data markers 3( ) Scatter graph with dot ( • ) data markers 4( ) Scatter graph with square ( 5( ) 6( ) Line graph with square ( ) data markers ) data markers Scatter graph with X (×) data markers c.
11-1 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 11 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations This section explains the various operations you can perform on the graph screen after drawing a graph. You can perform these operations on a graph screen produced by a sampling operation, or by the operation described under “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph” on page 10-2.
11-2 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations Key Operation Description K4(CALC) Displays a menu that lets you transform a sample result graph to a function using Fourier series expansion, and to perform regression to determine the tendency of a graph. See “Using Fourier Series Expansion to Transform a Waveform to a Function” on page 11-6, and “Performing Regression” on page 11-8. K5(Y=fx) Displays the graph function list, which lets you select a Y=f(x) graph to overlay on the sampled result graph.
11-3 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations k Using Trace Trace displays a crosshair pointer on the displayed graph along with the coordinates of the current cursor position. You can use the cursor keys to move the pointer along the graph. You can also use trace to obtain the periodic frequency value for a particular range, and assign the range (time) and periodic frequency values in separate Alpha-Memory values. u To use trace 1. On the graph screen, press !1(TRCE).
11-4 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 4. Press w to assign the period and periodic frequency values to Alpha-Memory variables. • This displays a dialog box for specifying variable names for [Period] and [Frequency] values. • The initial default variable name settings are “S” for the period and “H” for the periodic frequency. To change to another variable name, use the up and down cursor keys to move the highlighting to the item you want to change, and then press the applicable letter key. 5.
11-5 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Press w. • This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode. • The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode. To do this: Press this cursor key: Enlarge the graph image horizontally e Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally d Enlarge the graph image vertically f Reduce the size of the graph image vertically c 4. To exit the zoom mode, press J.
11-6 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 5. After everything is the way you want, press w. • This saves the lists and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the graph screen. • For details about using list data, see “Chapter 3 List Function”. Note • Pressing 1(All) in place of 2(SEL) in step 2 converts the entire graph to list data. In this case, the “Store Sample Data” dialog box appears as soon as you press 1(All).
11-7 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform Fourier series expansion, and then press w. • This displays a dialog box for specifying the start degree of the Fourier series. / 5. Input a value in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w. • This displays a dialog box for inputting the degree of the Fourier series. 6. Input a value in the range of 1 to 10, and then press w.
11-8 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations k Performing Regression You can use the procedure below to perform regression for a range specified using the trace pointer. All of the following regression types are supported: Linear, Med-Med, Quadratic, Cubic, Quartic, Logarithmic, Exponential, Power, Sine, and Logistic. For details about these regression types, see pages 6-12 through 6-14 under Chapter 6 of this manual. The following procedure shows how to perform quadratic regression.
11-9 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 5. Press 6(DRAW). • This draws a quadratic regression graph and overlays it over the original graph. • To delete the overlaid quadratic regression graph, press !4(SKTCH) and then 1(Cls). k Overlaying a Y=f(x) Graph on a Sampled Result Graph Use the following procedure when you want to overlay a Y=f(x) graph on the sampled result graph. u To overlay a Y=f(x) graph on an existing graph 1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 5(Y=fx).
11-10 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 4. After the graph function list settings are configured the way you want, press 6(DRAW). • This overlays graphs of all the functions for which graphing is turned on, over the graph that was originally on the graph screen. / Original Graph Overlaid with Y=f(x) Graph • To delete the overlaid graph, press !4(SKTCH) and then 1(Cls).
11-11 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is displayed, and then press w. • This enters the zoom mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear, along with a magnifying glass cursor ( ) in the center of the screen. 4. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen. 5. Press w.
11-12 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations u To move a particular graph on a multi-graph display 1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT). • This displays the [EDIT] menu. 2. Press 2(MOVE). • This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen. 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is displayed, and then press w. • This enters the move mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear. 4.
11-13 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to output from the speaker, and then press w. • After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown below appears on the display. / 4. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want. • The output frequency specification is a percent value. To output the original sound as-is, specify 100%.
11-14 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations k Configuring View Window Parameters Pressing !3(V-Window) while the graph screen is on the display displays a View Window function key menu along the bottom of the display. Press the function key that corresponds to the View Window parameter you want to configure. Function Key Description 1(Auto) Automatically applies the following View Window parameters.
12-1 Calling E-CON3 Functions from an eActivity 12 Calling E-CON3 Functions from an eActivity You can call E-CON3 functions from an eActivity by including an “Econ strip” in the eActivity file. The following describes each of the four available Econ strips. u Econ SetupWizard strip This strip calls the E-CON3 Setup Wizard. The Econ Setup Wizard strip makes it possible to perform the following series of operations from the eActivity: Data Logger setup using the Setup Wizard R Sampling R Graphing.
Manufacturer: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan Responsible within the European Union: Casio Europe GmbH Casio-Platz 1, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany www.casio-europe.
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan SA2210-E © 2020 CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
